JP5193464B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, a variable display device having three or more variable display units that variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other and derive and display a display result. And a gaming machine that can be controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a combination of specific identification information is derived and displayed as a variable display result.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a combination of specific identification information in the variable display device, the player Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state advantageous to the user.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific game state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit game state), or a state in which a right to be advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays a symbol as identification information is a combination of specific identification information (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, an almighty symbol (special symbol) having a symbol value for a plurality of (all types) symbols has been proposed so as to be variably displayed. For example, in a variable display device composed of three columns of left, middle, and right variable display units, when the almighty symbol stops at the left variable display unit that stops first, the right variable display that stops second Even if any symbol stops in the club, the reach is established, so that the gambling of the game is improved.

  Furthermore, even if the display result of the variable display device is not a specific display result, there is also proposed a gaming machine that generates a small hit gaming state that opens and closes the big prize opening in a manner different from the big hit gaming state when an almighty symbol is included. (For example, Patent Document 1).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the winning is determined when a special symbol appears, the appearance rate is extremely small, and the player is given an unpleasant feeling.
JP 2004-8694 A

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described situation, and a special symbol that gives the player a sense of expectation rather than a normal symbol is provided, and the game performance is improved by appropriately causing the special symbol to appear. An object is to provide a gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, left, middle, and right decorative symbols) that can identify each of the three or more variable display units (for example, left -A variable display device (for example, the variable display device 9) having a middle and right display area), and when a combination of specific identification information (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, A special variable prize that is controllable to an advantageous specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) and that can change from a state in which a gaming ball does not win in a specific gaming state to a state in which it is easy to win. A device (for example, a special variable winning device (big prize opening)), a game control means for controlling the progress of a game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), and a game control means Based on the command, presentation control means for controlling the effect device including a variable display device (e.g., presentation control microcomputer 100) and includes a specific game state, at least a first specific gaming state (sudden probability variation jackpot A big hit game state) and a second specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game state (for example, a big hit game state with a promising big hit), and the game control means determines whether or not to enter the specific game state (for example, Whether or not to make a big hit) and whether to enter the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state when making a specific gaming state (for example, whether to make a sudden odd or big odd hit) Predetermining means for determining before derivation display of the result (for example, a part for executing steps S57, S58, S61, S62 in the game control microcomputer 560) ) And whether the display result of the variable display device is set to the reach state when the predetermining means determines not to enter the specific game state (for example, N in step S59 in the game control microcomputer 560). Based on the determination results of the reach state determination means to be determined (for example, the part for executing steps S64 and S65 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the prior determination means and the reach state determination means, they are derived and displayed on each variable display section. Based on the identification information determining means for determining the identification information (for example, the part that executes steps S620, S625, S628, S629, S635, and S640 in the production control microcomputer 100) and the determination result of the predetermining means are variably displayed. Start of variable display of identification information and variable display time in equipment The variable display command transmission means (for example, the part that executes steps S207 and S29 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the determination result of the predetermination means are used for the first identification. In the gaming state and in the second specific gaming state, state control means for controlling the special variable winning device by a common processing routine (for example, a part for executing steps S304 to S306 in the gaming control microcomputer 560), and the specific gaming state Based on the fact that the game ball has won the special variable winning device in a gaming state other than the above, an abnormality notification command transmission means for transmitting an abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560) Steps S259 and S260 are executed And the effect control means starts variable display of the identification information in the variable display device based on the variable display command transmitted by the variable display command transmission means, and the variable display device when the variable display time has elapsed. Based on the variable display control means for deriving and displaying the display result (for example, the portion of steps S801 to S803 in the production control microcomputer 100) and the abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmission means, After the abnormality notification is started, the abnormality notification means that continues the abnormality notification even when the variable display control means is performing variable display of the identification information in the variable display device (for example, step S707 in the production control microcomputer 100, wherein a portion) to perform S836, the identification information, the first identification information For example, it includes a symbol other than a special symbol) and second identification information (for example, a special symbol), and the identification information determining means is determined not to be in a specific gaming state by the prior determining means (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 560) When the reach state determining means determines that the reach state is not set (for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the variation pattern without reach is determined in step S65). When the identification information is derived and displayed on two or more variable display units of the variable display device and the identification information is not derived and displayed on some of the variable display units, the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display unit. Of these, the identification information can be determined so that the first identification information is displayed on one variable display section and the second identification information is displayed on another variable display section. Certain identification information first determining means (for example, a portion in which the special symbol can be determined as the left symbol in step S1003 in the production control microcomputer 100 and the symbol other than the special symbol can be determined as the right symbol in step S1005). When the predetermining means decides not to enter the specific gaming state and the reach state judging means decides to reach the reach state (for example, in step S65 in the game control microcomputer 560, the variation pattern with reach is changed). Identification information is derived and displayed on two or more variable display units on the variable display device, and the identification information is derived and displayed at a time when the identification information is not derived and displayed on some variable display units. The identification information second can be determined so that the variable display unit does not become the second identification information. In the determination means (for example, the part in which the reach symbol can be determined so as not to reach the special symbol in step S1028 in the production control microcomputer 100) and the predetermining means, it is determined that the second specific gaming state is set. If it is determined (for example, when it is determined to be a probable big hit in step S62 in the game control microcomputer 560), the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display device by two or more variable display units. When the identification information is not derived and displayed on the variable display unit, the variable display unit on which the identification information is derived and displayed is determined to be the second identification information, and a part of the variable display unit has a predetermined period. Identification information third determination means (for example, an effect control microphone) that can determine the identification information derived and displayed later as predetermined identification information. In step S1136 in the computer 100, a probability variation symbol (such as “8CF”) that can be determined by a special symbol) and a case where the pre-determining means determines to enter the first specific gaming state (for example, for game control) When it is determined in step S62 in the microcomputer 560 that the sudden probability change jackpot is determined), the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display device by two or more variable display units, and the identification information is displayed on some variable display units. Is determined so as to be the second identification information in the variable display section in which the identification information is derived and displayed, and the identification information that is derived and displayed after a predetermined period of time in some variable display sections. Identification information fourth determination means that can determine identification information other than the predetermined identification information (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100) In step S1087, a sudden probability variation pattern (such as “31T”) determined by a special pattern) is included.

In another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention, three or more variable display units for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, left, middle, and right decorative symbols) that are identifiable and deriving and displaying the display results When a variable display device (for example, the variable display device 9) having (for example, left, middle, and right display areas) is provided, and a combination of specific identification information (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display The specific game state (for example, jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is controlled, and a special display result (for example, a probable variation jackpot symbol) determined in advance in a combination of specific identification information is derived and displayed. a favorable special game state for the player after the state has ended (e.g., probability variation state) controllable gaming machine (e.g. pachinko gaming machine 1), the game ball is not won in a particular game state A special variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning device (big prize opening)) that can be changed from a state to a state where it is easy to win, and a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, Effect control means (for example, effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the effect device including the variable display device based on a command transmitted by the game control means, and the specific game state is at least the first specific game. And a second specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state with a probable big hit) more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state, and the game control means includes a specific gaming state, whether the (e.g. whether a jackpot), and the second specific game state or the first specific game state when the specific game state And Luca, in advance determining means (e.g., a game control microcomputer 560 to determine whether a special game state after a specific game state (e.g. whether the probability variation big hit) and, in the derivation display the previous display results Steps S57, S58, S61, S62) and a variable display device when it is determined by the pre-determining means that the specific game state is not set (for example, N in step S59 in the game control microcomputer 560) Reach state determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the game is to be in a reach state (for example, a part for executing steps S64 and S65 in the game control microcomputer 560), and determination results of the prior determination means and the reach state determination means Based on the above, the identification information determination procedure for determining the identification information to be derived and displayed on each variable display unit Based on the stage (for example, the part that executes steps S620, S625, S628, S629, S635, and S640 in the production control microcomputer 100) and the determination result of the predetermining means, variable display of the identification information in the variable display device is performed. Based on variable display command transmission means for transmitting a variable display command that can specify the start and variable display time (for example, a part for executing steps S207 and S29 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the determination result of the predetermination means. Thus, state control means for controlling the special variable winning device by a common processing routine in both the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state (for example, a part for executing steps S304 to S306 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). And other than the specific gaming state An abnormality notification command transmitting means for transmitting an abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification based on the fact that the game ball has won the special variable winning device in the technical state (for example, step S259 in the game control microcomputer 560). The execution control means starts variable display of the identification information on the variable display device based on the variable display command transmitted by the variable display command transmission means, and the variable display time has elapsed. Sometimes based on variable display control means for deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display device (for example, the portion executing steps S801 to S803 in the production control microcomputer 100) and the abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmission means. Variable after the start of abnormality notification by the production device Abnormality notification means for continuing abnormality notification even when the display control means is performing variable display of the identification information on the variable display device (for example, a portion executing steps S707 and S836 in the production control microcomputer 100); The identification information includes first identification information (for example, a symbol other than a special symbol) and second identification information (for example, a special symbol), and the identification information determining means determines that the specific game state is not set in the prior determination means. (For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 is N in step S59), and the reach state determination means determines that the reach state is not set (for example, the reach is determined in step S65 in the game control microcomputer 560). Two or more of variable display devices). One of the variable display units from which the identification information is derived and displayed when the identification information is derived and displayed on the upper variable display unit and the identification information is not derived and displayed on some of the variable display units. In the first identification information, the identification information can be determined so as to be the second identification information in the other variable display section (for example, the left design in step S1003 in the production control microcomputer 100). The special symbol is determined, and in step S1005, the symbol other than the special symbol can be determined as the right symbol), and the predetermining means determines that the specific gaming state is not set, and the reach state determining means sets the reach state. (For example, in step S65 in the game control microcomputer 560, the variation pattern with reach is determined. The identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display device at the time when the identification information is derived and displayed on two or more variable display sections and the identification information is not derived and displayed on some of the variable display sections. In the variable display section, identification information second determination means that can determine the identification information so as not to be the second identification information (for example, the reach design so as not to reach the special design in step S1028 in the production control microcomputer 100). A portion that can be determined) and a case where it is determined in the predetermining means that the specific gaming state is set, and after the specific gaming state it is determined that the special gaming state is set (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 560) If it is determined in S62 that the probability variation is a big hit, the identification information is displayed on the variable display device with two or more variable display units. At the time when the identification information is not derived and displayed on some of the variable display sections, the variable display section on which the identification information is derived and displayed is determined to be the second identification information, and some of the variable display sections are variable. Identification information fifth determination means capable of determining the identification information derived and displayed after a predetermined period of time on the display unit as predetermined identification information (for example, a probable variation pattern based on a special symbol in step S1136 in the production control microcomputer 100) (E.g., “8CF” etc.) and a case where it is determined in the pre-determining means that it is determined to be in a specific gaming state and not to be in a special gaming state after the specific gaming state (for example, for game control) When it is determined in step S62 in the microcomputer 560 that a normal big hit is made), the variable display device is identified by two or more variable display units. When the information is derived and displayed, and the identification information is not derived and displayed on some variable display parts, the variable display part on which the identification information is derived and displayed is determined to be the second identification information, and partly Identification information sixth determination means that can determine the identification information derived and displayed after a predetermined period of time in the variable display section as identification information other than the predetermined identification information (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 in the ninth embodiment) In step S1066, a non-probable variable symbol (such as “13CF”) can be determined using a special symbol.

  First stop identification information determination first data (e.g., left symbol selection table) which is data for determining identification information of the first variable display section that first derives and displays identification information among the three or more variable display sections. (T-1)), and the first data for determining the first stop identification information has a higher ratio of determining the second identification information as the identification information derived and displayed than the ratio of determining the first identification information. (For example, according to the left symbol selection table (T-1) in FIG. 64, the ratio determined as the special symbol as the left symbol is higher than the ratio determined as the other left symbol) The identification information determination means is determined not to be in the specific gaming state by the prior determination means (for example, at the time of N in step S59 in the game control microcomputer 560), and reaches the reach state. When it is determined by the determination means that the reach state is not to be established (for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines a change pattern without reach in step S65), the first stop identification information determination first The identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit may be determined based on the data (for example, a part for executing step S1003 in the production control microcomputer 100).

  The game state includes a normal game state (for example, a normal effect mode) different from the specific game state and the special game state, and a special game state (for example, a story mode) in which the effect state is different from the normal game state. The first data for determining the first stop identification information includes the second data for determining the first stop identification information (for example, the left symbol selection table (T-1)) and the third data for determining the first stop identification information (for example, the story). The third symbol for determining the first stop identification information is the first identification information to be derived and displayed more than the second data for determining the first stop identification information. 2 is configured so that the ratio to be determined as identification information is high (for example, the ratio determined as a special symbol as a left symbol by the left symbol selection table (JT-1) in the story mode of FIG. 68). 64, the left symbol selection table (T-1) in FIG. 64 is configured to be higher than the ratio determined as the special symbol as the left symbol), and the identification information determining means does not enter the specific gaming state in the prior determining means. Is determined (for example, N in step S59 in the game control microcomputer 560), and it is determined in the reach state determination means that the reach state is not set (for example, reach is performed in step S65 in the game control microcomputer 560). And the first variable display portion based on the second data for determining the first stop identification information when the normal gaming state (for example, N in step S1001). The identification information to be derived and displayed is determined (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100). Step S1003 is executed), when it is determined that the specific game state is not set in the pre-determining means, and it is determined that the reach state is not set in the reach state determining means, and is in the special game state (for example, Y in step S1001) In this case, the identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit is determined based on the first data for determining the first stop identification information (for example, the step of executing step S1010 in the production control microcomputer 100). It may be configured as follows.

  The second identification information includes at least third identification information (for example, a decorative pattern of “3”) and fourth identification information (for example, a decorative pattern of “7 (outlined)”), and includes first determination information for determining first stop identification information. The first stop identification information determination fourth data (for example, the left symbol selection table (T-1)) and the first stop identification information determination fifth data (for example, the common jackpot symbol selection table (F -2)), and the identification information determination means is determined not to be in the specific gaming state by the prior determination means (for example, in the case of N in step S59 in the gaming control microcomputer 560), and reach state determination When it is determined in the means that the reach state is not to be established (for example, in step S65 in the game control microcomputer 560, the variation pattern without the reach is determined). The identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit based on the first stop identification information determination fourth data (for example, the step of executing step S1003 in the production control microcomputer 100) ), When it is determined by the pre-determining means to be in the specific gaming state (for example, in the case of Y in step S59 in the gaming control microcomputer 560), based on the fifth data for determining the first stop identification information 1 The identification information derived and displayed on the variable display unit is determined (for example, the part in step S1136 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the third identification information is determined in the first stop identification information determination fourth data. In the ratio X1 (for example, X1 in the second embodiment) and the fourth data for determining the first stop identification information A ratio X2 determined as 4 identification information (for example, X2 in the second embodiment), a ratio X3 determined as third identification information in the first stop identification information determination fifth data (for example, X3 in the second embodiment), The ratio X4 (for example, X4 in the second embodiment) determined as the fourth identification information in the first stop identification information determination fifth data may be configured to satisfy the relationship X1 / X3 <X2 / X4. .

  The identification information determining means is determined not to be in the specific gaming state by the predetermining means (for example, when N in step S59 in the game control microcomputer 560), and is determined to be in the reach state by the reach state determining means. (For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines a change pattern with reach in step S65), the final stop identification information, which is identification information derived and displayed after reaching the reach state, Difference determination table for determining a difference from identification information other than stop identification information (for example, symbol selection table during normal deviation (H-4) and symbol selection table during super development (H-5)) The final stop identification information is determined based on (for example, the production control microcomputer 1). Step S1031, the portion executes S1036) may be configured to at 0.

  A variable winning device (for example, variable winning ball device 15) that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball does not win and an open state in which the game ball can win, and an open / close determining means (for example, an open / closed state of the variable winning device) The portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes step S261 or step S184) and when the variable winning device is determined to be other than the open state by the open / close determination means (eg, N in step S261 or Y in step S184) An abnormality notification means (for example, a part for executing step S707 in the production control microcomputer 100) that performs abnormality notification based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device. The abnormality notification means is also operable when the variable display device is executing variable display of identification information. Knowledge it is possible to perform (e.g., in effect control microcomputer 100, step S1016～S1029, S834, processing is possible to execute S836) may be configured to.

  The effect control means may be configured to store variable display control data for executing variable display of identification information in the variable display device and abnormality notification control data for executing abnormality notification by the effect device. Good.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, when the identification information determining means determines that the pre-determining means does not enter the specific gaming state and the reach state determining means determines that the reach state is not set, the variable display device 2 One of the variable display units from which the identification information is derived and displayed when the identification information is derived and displayed on one or more variable display units and the identification information is not derived and displayed on some of the variable display units. The identification information first determining means capable of determining the identification information so as to be the first identification information in the part, the second identification information in the other variable display part, and the predetermining means determined not to enter the specific gaming state, and When the reach state determination means determines to reach the reach state, the identification information is derived and displayed on two or more variable display units on the variable display device, and the identification information is derived on some variable display units. The identification information second determination means capable of determining the identification information so that it does not become the second identification information in the variable display section in which the identification information is derived and displayed at the time not shown, and the second specific game in the prior determination means When it is determined to be in a state, the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display device by two or more variable display units, and the identification information is not derived and displayed by some variable display units. Can be determined to be the second identification information in the variable display part in which is derived and displayed, and the identification information derived and displayed after a predetermined period of time in some variable display parts can be determined as the predetermined identification information When the identification information third determining unit and the predetermining unit determine to enter the first specific gaming state, the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display device by two or more variable display units. Variable display The identification information that is determined to be the second identification information in the variable display section in which the identification information is derived and displayed when the information is not derived and displayed, and is derived and displayed after a predetermined period in some of the variable display sections Identification information fourth determination means that can determine identification information other than predetermined identification information. Thereby, the specific gaming state (the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state) is determined when the reach state is reached with the second identification information (special symbol). Furthermore, when the predetermined identification information is derived and displayed from the reach state, the player enters a second specific game state that is more advantageous to the player, so that the game performance can be improved.

  In the invention described in claim 2, it is possible to control to a special gaming state advantageous to the player after the specific gaming state is ended when a predetermined special display result is derived and displayed among combinations of specific identification information. Whether or not the predetermining means is in a specific gaming state and whether to be in a special gaming state after the specific gaming state is determined prior to the display display of the display result, and the identification information determining means In the determining means, when it is determined that the specific gaming state is set and it is determined that the special gaming state is set after the specific gaming state, the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display device by two or more variable display units. When the identification information is not derived and displayed on some of the variable display units, the variable display unit on which the identification information is derived and displayed is determined to be the second identification information, and on some of the variable display units Predetermined period The identification information fifth determination means capable of determining the identification information derived and displayed later as predetermined identification information and the prior determination means determine that the specific gaming state is set, and the special gaming state after the specific gaming state If the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display device by two or more variable display units and the identification information is not derived and displayed on some variable display units, the identification information is not displayed. The variable display part that is derived and displayed is determined to be the second identification information, and the identification information that is derived and displayed after a predetermined period of time on some variable display parts is determined as identification information other than the predetermined identification information. Identification information sixth determination means that is possible. Thus, it is determined that the specific gaming state is entered when the reach state is reached with the second identification information (special symbol). Furthermore, when predetermined identification information is derived and displayed from the reach state, a special game state advantageous to the player after the specific game state is obtained, so that the gameability can be improved.

  In the invention according to claim 3, the first data for determining the first stop identification information, which is the data for determining the identification information of the first variable display section that first derives and displays the identification information among the three or more variable display sections. The first data for determining the first stop identification information is configured such that a ratio determined as the second identification information as the identification information derived and displayed is higher than a ratio determined as the first identification information. The identification information determining means determines the first data for determining the first stop identification information when it is determined that the predetermination means does not enter the specific gaming state and the reach state determination means determines that the reach state is not established. The identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit is determined based on the above. As a result, even in the case of a loss, the second identification information that becomes the specific gaming state in the reach state often appears, and the player can be expected to become the specific gaming state. Improvement can be achieved.

  The invention according to claim 4 includes, as the gaming state, a normal gaming state different from the specific gaming state and the special gaming state, and a special gaming state having a different performance mode from the normal gaming state, and the first stop identification information The first data for determination includes second data for determining first stop identification information and third data for determining first stop identification information, and the third data for determining first stop identification information is the first stop identification information determination. It is configured such that the ratio of determining the second identification information as the identification information derived and displayed is higher than the second data for use, and the identification information determination means is determined not to be in the specific gaming state in the prior determination means. When the reach state determination means determines that the reach state is not set and the game state is the normal game state, it is derived and displayed on the first variable display unit based on the second data for determining the first stop identification information. For determining the first stop identification information when it is determined that the specific game state is not determined by the pre-determining means, the non-reach state is determined by the reach state determining means, and the special game state is determined. The identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit is determined based on the third data. Accordingly, the second identification information frequently appears in the special gaming state, and the player can be expected to enter the specific gaming state, thereby improving the gaming property.

  In the invention according to claim 5, the second identification information includes at least the third identification information and the fourth identification information, and the first data for determining the first stop identification information includes the fourth data for determining the first stop identification information, And the first stop identification information determination fifth data. The identification information determination means is determined not to be in the specific gaming state by the prior determination means, and is determined not to be in the reach state by the reach state determination means. In this case, the identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit is determined based on the fourth data for determining the first stop identification information, and when it is determined by the predetermining means to be in the specific gaming state, The ratio X of determining the identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display section based on the first stop identification information determination fifth data and determining the third identification information in the first stop identification information determination fourth data And the ratio X2 determined as the fourth identification information in the first stop identification information determination fourth data, the ratio X3 determined as the third identification information in the first stop identification information determination fifth data, and the first stop identification The ratio X4 determined as the fourth identification information in the information determination fifth data satisfies the relationship X1 / X3 <X2 / X4. In this way, there are a plurality of special symbols (third identification information, fourth identification information, etc.), and when the first symbol stops, the expectation of entering a specific gaming state differs for each special symbol. Improvement can be achieved.

  In the invention according to claim 6, after the identification information determining means is determined not to be in the specific gaming state by the prior determining means and is determined to be in the reach state by the reach state determining means, The final stop identification information is determined based on a difference determination table for determining the difference between the final stop identification information that is derived and displayed and the identification information other than the final stop identification information. Has been. Thereby, according to the setting value of the difference determination table, the ratio of the display result close to the combination of specific identification information (big hit symbol) is increased, or the ratio of the distant display result to the big hit symbol is increased. be able to.

  According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, a variable winning device that can be changed between a closed state in which no game ball is won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, an open / close determining means for determining an open / closed state of the variable winning device, and an open / close determination Abnormality notification means for performing abnormality notification based on the fact that the game ball has won the variable winning device when it is determined by the means that the variable winning device is not in the open state, Is configured such that abnormality notification can be performed even when variable display of identification information is being performed in the variable display device. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that a prize abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act on the variable prize device, and as a result, an illegal act on the variable prize device can be surely prevented. In addition, since the game can be continued even when the winning abnormality is notified, the player is not disadvantaged even when the notification is made due to a malfunction.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

(Embodiment 1)
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7 variably display and display a plurality of types of decorative decorations that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, the hitting of the hit ball at the start winning opening 14). A variable display device 9 for deriving and displaying the result is arranged. In this embodiment, the variable display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and the decorative symbols are arranged in the vertical direction (in this embodiment, in the left, middle and right display regions (decorative symbol display areas)). , From top to bottom) is variably displayed. In the display areas of the left, middle, and right columns, three consecutive frames of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed when variable display of decorative symbols is stopped (see FIG. 3 and the like). In this embodiment, a mode (story mode) is provided in which the variable display device 9 provides an effect by an image. In the story mode, the decorative symbols of one frame in each of the left, middle, and right columns are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 119).

  Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to stop and display the symbol (excluding temporary stop before execution of the so-called re-lottery effect and temporary stop before execution of the relief effect).

  A special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers “0” to “9”, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display more types of numbers such as “0” to “99” in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol.

  The variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. The special symbol display 8 that performs variable display of the special symbols is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board.

  At the bottom of the variable display device 9, four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of reserved memories (also referred to as start memory or start winning memory). A special symbol storage display 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Each time the variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In this example, since the special symbol display 8 and the special symbol hold memory display 18 are provided separately, the number of hold memories can be displayed even during variable display. In the display area of the variable display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the variable display device 9, there is formed a first start winning opening 13 through which a game ball can be won. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, a second start winning opening 14 is formed immediately below the first starting winning opening 13. The second start winning opening 14 is provided with a variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes. When the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the physically closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning hole 14, and when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the physically open state, the second start winning prize is obtained. A game ball can be won in the mouth 14. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened and closed by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 (easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a.

  A special variable winning device that is opened by the solenoid 21 in the big hit gaming state is provided below the second start winning port 14. The special variable winning device includes an opening / closing plate 20 and forms a big winning opening. The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided directly above the variable display device 9. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When a game ball wins the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (a symbol can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit when the variable display ends, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to a player's advantageous state when the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing to the gate 32, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39, and winning of the game balls to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 is performed by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Detected. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning. A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  Also, below the left speaker 27 is provided a prize ball LED 51 that is lit while paying out the prize ball, and below the right speaker 27 is provided a ball cut LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut. Yes. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending of a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). In addition, a status indicator for notifying the player of a gaming state inside the gaming machine (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, and a short time state, which will be described later) is provided at a predetermined location on the gaming board 6 (not shown). ).

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. If the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a, it is in a state where variable symbol display can be started ( For example, when the big hit game ends or the previous variable display ends), the special symbol display 8 starts the variable display (variation) of the special symbol, and the variable display device 9 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. If the variable symbol special display cannot be started, the reserved memory number for the special symbol storage memory display 18 is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol of the variable display device 9 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a probable variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) or a non-probability variation symbol of the big hit symbol, it shifts to a big hit gaming state (probable big hit or non-probable big hit (also called normal big hit)) . That is, the special variable prize-winning device is opened until a certain time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning device is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol is changed to the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) or the non-probability variation symbol, the jackpot gaming state is continued for 15 rounds. The

  In addition, when the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a special probability variation symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sudden probability variation symbol), a special jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “suddenly sudden”) that makes the player recognize that the gaming state has suddenly shifted to the certain probability variation state. It is called probable big hit.) In the case of sudden probability big hit, the special variable winning device is opened twice for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In the sudden probability change big hit, it is one round from when the special variable winning device is opened until it is closed, and the gaming state of the sudden probability change big hit is continued for two rounds. It should be noted that, in the sudden odds big win, the period during which the special variable prize winning device is opened is short, and ten game balls do not win while the special variable prize winning device is open. Therefore, until ten game balls win the big prize opening. Need not be defined as one round. When a sudden odd jackpot occurs, unlike in the case of 15 round jackpots, the effects of each round do not proceed in sequence on the variable display device 9, but the game state suddenly shifts to the probable state. A special performance is performed to show the person.

  In addition, when the stop symbol at the time of stop becomes a predetermined small hit symbol, the game may be shifted to the small hit game state in which the game value given to the player is smaller than the big hit game state. In other words, the game may be shifted to a gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In the small hit game state, the same game value is given as the game value given to the player when a sudden probability big hit occurs. However, unlike the case of sudden probability change big hit, the gaming state is not shifted to the probability changing state after the small hit gaming state ends. From this, when there is a small hit, the player expects a sudden probability change big hit to occur rather than the small hit. Even when a small hit occurs, a special effect similar to that at the time of sudden big odd hit is executed. Such a special effect is called a two-round effect. As for the effects for two rounds, there are two special effects, one that is executed when a sudden odd-change big hit occurs, and the other is a combination of sudden / small hits that is executed when either a sudden big change or small hit occurs suddenly. It may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 are synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the variable display period (variable display time) is the same. In addition, the display result on the special symbol display 8 (a special symbol stop symbol) corresponds to the display result on the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol stop symbol). The correspondence between the two symbols will be described later.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the decorative symbols displayed in the three display areas of the variable display device 9, as shown in FIG. 2, the numerical symbols “1” to “7” “7 (outlined)”. And a symbol symbol “*” indicating a blank between numeric symbols. During variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols, in principle, the left display area displays the decorative symbols “7 (outlined)”, “*”, “7”, “*” in numerical order, and the middle and right In the display area, decorative symbols “1”, “*”, “2”,... “*” Are displayed in numerical order. Note that the decorative symbol displayed in the left display area is called “left symbol”, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle display region is called “middle symbol”, and the decorative symbol displayed in the right display region is “ It is sometimes called “right design”. In this embodiment, “2”, “4”, and “6” are decorative symbols for non-probable variation symbols, and when these symbols become jackpot symbols, they usually become big hits. “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” are decorative symbols for probability variation symbols, and when these symbols become jackpot symbols, a probability variation jackpot is obtained. Also, the decorative symbol “7 (outlined)” is a special symbol. This special symbol is a decorative symbol that is determined to be a big hit when reaching a reach. That is, in this embodiment, after reaching a special symbol, if any of the decorative symbols “3”, “7”, and “7 (outlined)” is derived and displayed as a middle symbol (for example, When the decorative symbols of “7 (outlined)”, “7” and “7 (outlined)” are derived and displayed on the active line), it is a probable big hit. Further, after reaching the reach mode with a special symbol, if any one of the decorative symbols “1”, “2”, “4”, “5”, and “6” is derived and displayed (for example, “7 ( (When white) ”,“ 4 ”,“ 7 (white) ”decorative symbols are derived and displayed on the active line), the probability suddenly becomes a big hit. The non-probable decorative pattern ("2" "4" "6") is displayed in blue, and the probabilistic variable decorative pattern ("1" "3" "5" "7") is displayed in red. For example, each may be identified. In this embodiment, the special symbol is “7 (outlined)”, but any symbol may be used as long as it can be distinguished from other decorative symbols.

  Next, the type of gaming state and the transition of gaming state will be described.

  The probability variation state (probability variation state) refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player who has a higher probability of making a big hit (that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol) than the normal gaming state and the short-time state. In this embodiment, the term “probability change state” does not include a short time state of probability change described later unless explicitly stated.

  The time-short state (time shortening state) is a gaming state in which the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 is shorter than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state. I mean. By shortening the variable display time in this way, the variable display of symbols is frequently executed, and the probability of jackpot per unit time is improved, resulting in an advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, in the normal symbol display 10, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and one of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball device 15 or Both are higher than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and become a more advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is shorter than that of the normal game state and the probability change state. In this embodiment, the term “short-time state” does not include a short-term state of probability change described later unless explicitly stated.

  The probability change short state means a game state that is a probability change state and a time short state. The probabilistic short time state is a very advantageous state for the player.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state transitions as follows.

(1) When the normal game state and the short-time state, the probability change symbol (excluding the sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, the gaming state is changed from the normal game state and the short-time state to the probability change time-short state . As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(2) When the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state, the probability variation symbol (excluding sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, if the game state is the probability variation state, it will shift to the probability variation time short state, When the gaming state is the short state at the time of probability change, the short state at the time of probability change is maintained without changing. As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(3) When the normal game state and the short-time state suddenly become a big hit with a probable change symbol, and when the big hit game is completed, the game state is shifted from the normal game state and the short-time state to a positive change state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state.

(4) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state suddenly a big hit with a probability change symbol, and when the big hit game ends, if the game state is the probability change state, the probability change state continues without changing, and the game state changes When it is in the short-time state, the short-term state at the time of probability change is continued without changing. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. In addition, after the sudden probability big hit game is ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the probability variation state.

(5) In the normal game state and in the short-time state, a big hit is made with a non-probable variable symbol, and when the big-hit game is ended, the short-time state is controlled by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the transition from the normal gaming state to the short-time state is made a predetermined number of times of variation, and when the gaming state is the short-time state, the short-time state is continued for a predetermined number of times of variation. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(6) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state, a big hit is made with a non-probability variation symbol, and when the big hit game is ended, the time is controlled to a short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit ends. In other words, the state is shifted from the probability variation state and the probability variation short time state to the short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

  The transition of the gaming state as described above is an example, and the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of reach symbols. As shown in FIG. 3, the variable display device 9 is divided into left, middle and right display areas. In the display area of each column, three consecutive frames of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the decorative display of 3 rows × 3 columns (= 9 symbols) is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 and is visually recognized by the player.

  In the variable display device 9, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (except for the symbol “*”) derived and displayed thereafter is displayed on the active line. When you have the same design, you win a big hit. In this embodiment, five lines of “upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “lower right” and “upward right” are provided as effective lines.

  In this embodiment, reach is established when the left symbol and the right symbol (excluding the symbol “*”) are aligned on the same effective line. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, when the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned with the same symbol “1” in the upper line (“1UH”), the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol “1” in the lower line. When aligned (“1LH”), when the left symbol and right symbol are aligned with the same symbol “1” in the middle line (“1CH”), when the left symbol and right symbol are double lines (lower right and up right) When the same symbols “1” and “7 (outlined)” are aligned (“1WH”), reach is established.

  The symbols (1UH, 1LH, etc.) attached to each reach symbol indicate the symbol number (“1”, “2”, “3”...), And the second digit indicates a line (“ “Upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “double line”), and the first digit “H” indicates a state of “Hazure”. In the second-digit line display, “U” is an abbreviation for “upper” Upper, “C” is an abbreviation for “middle” Center, “L” is an abbreviation for “lower” Lower, “W” indicates “double line”. For example, “7CH” means that the symbol is “7”, “middle line”, and “out”.

  When the outlier design for reach is determined, it may happen that the determined outlier symbol becomes the reach of the special symbol. However, when it comes to the reach of special symbols, the big hit will be confirmed. Therefore, in this embodiment, control for prohibiting the reach of the special symbol when the off symbol is determined is executed.

  In this embodiment, when reach is established, an effect different from normal is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the variable display device 9 are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (decoration design etc.)) or a background display mode (for example, color) of the variable display device 9 is displayed. May be changed.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the stop symbol of the special symbol and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the outlier symbol of both symbols, the probability variation symbol, the non-probability variation symbol, and the sudden probability variation symbol) will be described.

(1) Special design stop design:
As described above, the special symbols variably displayed on the special symbol display 8 are “0” to “9”. Of these, “0” to “4”, “8”, “9” are outliers, “7” is a probabilistic variable, “6” is a non-probable variable, and “5” is a sudden probabilistic symbol. It is.

(2) Decorative design stop design:
As described above, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are “1”, “*”, “2”, and “*”, respectively.

(2-1) A decorative pattern is a non-designated pattern in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is not aligned on all active lines (for example, “356”, etc., which will be described later) Suddenly the probability variation pattern is excluded.) In addition, although the left and right decorative symbols are aligned on the effective line in the same pattern (although it is a reach), the state in which only the decorative symbols in the middle are not aligned on the effective line is also an outlier.

(2-2) The big hit symbol of the decorative symbol is a symbol in a state where a combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned on the same effective line. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of jackpot symbols. As shown in FIG. 4, the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols (except for the symbol “*”) is aligned on the same line. For example, as shown in FIG. 4, when a combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the upper line (“1UF”), the combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols is When the same symbol “1” is aligned on the lower line (“1LF”), when the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is aligned with the same symbol “1” (“1CF”) on the left・ When the combination of the middle and right decorative symbols is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the line that falls to the right (“1SF”), the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is the same symbol “1” in the line that rises to the right ”(“ 1AF ”) is a big hit.

  The symbol (1UF, 1LF, etc.) attached to each jackpot symbol is the symbol number (“1” “2” “3”...) In the third digit, and the second digit is displayed in a line (“ “Upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “lower right”, “upward right”), and the first digit “F” indicates a “big hit” (Fever) state. In the second-digit line display, “U” is an abbreviation for “upper” Upper, “C” is an abbreviation for “middle” Center, “L” is an abbreviation for “lower” Lower, “S” is an acronym for “downward right” SAGARI, and “A” is an acronym for “upward right” AGARI. For example, “7AF” means that the symbol is “7”, “rising line to the right”, and “big hit”.

  Among the jackpot symbols shown in Fig. 4, the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in a specific pattern ("1", "3", "5", "7") on the active line is definitely changed. It is a design. Specifically, in FIG. 4, “1UF” “1LF” “1CF” “1SF” “1AF”, “3UF” “3LF” “3CF” “3SF” “3AF”, “5UF” “5LF” “5CF” The symbols “5SF”, “5AF”, “7UF”, “7LF”, “7CF”, “7SF”, and “7AF” are probable variations. Also, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 4, the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is aligned on the active line with symbols other than the specific symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”). Is an uncertain variable. Specifically, in FIG. 4, “2UF” “2LF” “2CF” “2SF” “2AF”, “4UF” “4LF” “4CF” “4SF” “4AF”, “6UF” “6LF” “6CF” The symbols “6SF” and “6AF” are non-probable variations. In addition, the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is a special symbol “7 (white)” on the active line, and the inner decorative symbols are predetermined symbols (“3”, “7”, “7 (white)). )) Is a probabilistic variation. Specifically, in FIG. 4, “8UF” “8LF” “8CF” “8SF” “8AF”, “9UF” “9LF” “9CF” “9SF” “9AF”, “10UF” “10LF” “10CF” The symbol “10SF” is also a probability variable symbol.

  In this embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is performed after the big hit game is started, the stop symbol derived and displayed when the change is stopped does not correspond to the special symbol and the decorative symbol. For example, even if the stop symbol of the special symbol that is derived and displayed at the time of fluctuation stop is the probability variation symbol “7”, when the re-lottery effect is executed after starting the big hit game, The stop symbol is a non-probable variable symbol “2UF” or the like. In this case, the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game.

(2-3) In this embodiment, in order to notify the player that there is a high probability of being a big hit or a big hit, the left, middle and right An effect of stopping and displaying a special combination of decorative symbols is executed. Such a special combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns is called a chance for production.

  As shown in FIG. 5, forty chance opportunities (“1C” to 40C ”) are provided. The symbol (C) attached to each chance is an abbreviation of “Chance”. When the chance chance in the production shown in FIG. 5 is stopped and displayed, it is then developed into super reach. Therefore, the player expects a big hit when the chance is stopped and displayed.

  When a missing symbol is determined, the determined missing symbol may happen to be a chance. In this case, if the chance item is derived and displayed, the player may be misunderstood that it does not develop into super reach but develops into super reach (high possibility of a big hit). In order to avoid such misunderstandings, in this embodiment, control for prohibiting derivation and display of the same symbol as the chance eye as a symbol is executed.

(2-4) Suddenly probable variation of decorative symbols The combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed with special symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”) that are different on the middle line. It is a pattern of the state. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, six types of symbols (designs surrounded by a thick frame: “1T” “2T” “3T” “4T” “5T” “6T”) Is provided. Specifically, a symbol in a state where “246”, “264”, “426”, “462”, “624”, and “642” are stopped and displayed on the middle line is a suddenly probable symbol. In addition, the suddenly probable pattern is also called a chance chance for sudden use.

  The sudden probability variation symbol is a kind of jackpot symbol, but it is desirable not to easily recognize the occurrence of the jackpot by the sudden probability variation symbol in order to make it appear that it has suddenly shifted to the probability variation state. For this reason, as described above, the suddenly probable symbols are different from the other jackpot symbols.

  In addition, the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is a special symbol “7 (outlined)” on the active line, and the decorative symbol in the middle is a symbol other than a predetermined symbol (“1” “2” “4”). The symbols in the state of “5” and “6”) are also suddenly probabilistic symbols. Specifically, in FIG. 7, the symbols “31T” to “33T”, “35T” to “55T” are also probable variations. “34T” is a big hit symbol and is not used.

  When a missing symbol is determined, it may happen that the determined missing symbol suddenly suddenly becomes a probabilistic symbol. In this case, if the probability variation pattern is suddenly derived and displayed, the player may be misunderstood that the state has been shifted to the probability variation state without being shifted to the probability variation state. In order to avoid such misunderstandings, in this embodiment, a control is executed that prohibits suddenly derivation and display of the same symbol as the probability variation symbol as a symbol.

  In FIG. 6, symbols other than the sudden probability variation symbols (“7T” to “30T”; hereinafter referred to as “probability similar symbols”) are also shown. These suddenly similar symbols have the same sequence (combination) of the sudden probability variation symbols and numbers, but are stopped and displayed on a line different from the line where the sudden probability variation symbols are stopped. That is, in the example of “246”, the suddenly probable symbols are stopped and displayed on the middle line, but the suddenly similar symbols are stopped and displayed on the upper and lower lines. Since such a symbol suddenly resembles a probable variation symbol, if it is derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, the player may misunderstand that the sudden probability variation symbol has been derived and displayed. For this reason, as in the case of the sudden probability variation symbol, a control is executed to prohibit the derivation and display of the sudden similarity symbol as a symbol. In addition, when determining the off symbol, control is performed to prohibit the reach of the special symbol, so that the sudden probability variation symbol of “31T” to “33T”, “35T” to “55T” cannot be obtained. Absent.

  Alternatively, a small hit symbol (a chance for a small hit) may be prepared so that a small hit is obtained when the chance for a small hit is reached. In this case, control is executed to prohibit the small hit symbol from being derived and displayed as a symbol.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 8 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) 53 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The basic circuit 53 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, and a game control microcomputer 560 having a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program. And an I / O port unit 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. In that case, the I / O port unit 57 is also included in the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (or performs processing) specifically. Is that the CPU 56 executes control according to the program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a basic circuit 53 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  Also, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the basic circuit 53 is mounted on the main board 31 and is specially variable. A solenoid circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the winning device (opening / closing plate 20) and the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 according to a command from the basic circuit 53 is also mounted on the main board 31, and is used for game control when the power is turned on. In accordance with data provided from a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the microcomputer 560 and the basic circuit 53, an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state is sent to an external device such as a hall computer. Information output circuit 64 is also mounted on main board 31. It has been.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 performs display control of the special symbol display 8 that variably displays the special symbol, and also performs display control of the normal symbol display 10 that variably displays the normal symbol. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the display state of the special symbol hold storage display 18 and also controls the display state of the normal symbol hold storage display 41.

  The hitting ball launching device that hits and launches the game ball launches the game ball toward the game area 7 as the launch motor 94 rotates. A power signal for driving the firing motor 94 is supplied to the firing motor 94 via the touch sensor substrate 90 from a power source mounted on a power supply board (not shown). A connection signal (VL signal) is input from the card unit 50 to the touch sensor substrate 90 via the interface substrate 66. Further, the touching of the operation knob (hitting ball handle) 5 by the player is detected by a touch sensor mounted on the touch sensor substrate 90. Then, the detection signal from the touch sensor and the signal from the power source are input to one AND circuit on the touch sensor substrate 90, and the output signal of the one AND circuit and the VL signal from the card unit 50 are the touch sensor substrate. 90 is input to another AND circuit, and a signal is output from the other AND circuit to the firing motor 94. Therefore, when the detection signal is not output from the touch sensor because the VL signal from the card unit 50 is not output to the touch sensor substrate 90 or the player does not touch the operation knob 5, the firing motor 94 Driving is stopped.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the variable display device 9 that receives and variably displays the decorative design is performed.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 9, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 100 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a strobe signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 9 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 105. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted bidirectionally between the effect control microcomputer 100, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative designs) in advance. Is. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control of the variable display device 9 based on data input from the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15, including S44 and S45).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, and a payout stop An initial value is set to a flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the initialization control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the variable display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the stop period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the stop period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the variable display device 9.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R (big hit determination random number).

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol or a random number for determining a variation pattern, and the display random number update process is for generating a display random number. This is a process of updating the count value of the counter. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34.

  In addition, the CPU 56 detects that a game ball has won the big winning opening at a time other than the regular time, or has detected that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 at a time other than the regular time. In such a case, a process for notifying abnormal winning is performed (step S23: abnormal winning notifying process).

  Next, processing for updating the count value of each counter for generating random numbers for determination such as random numbers for determining jackpot symbols used for game control is performed (determination random number update processing: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to generate a big hit (for big hit judgment)
(2) Random 2: Determine the type of jackpot (for determining the jackpot type)
(3) Random 3: Determine the special symbol's off symbol (for determining off symbol)
(4) Random 4: Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination) (5) Random 5: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for determination per normal symbol)
(6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the random 1 initial value)
(7) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the random 5 initial value)

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2) a big hit type determination random number, and (5) a normal symbol determination determination. A counter for generating a random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (7) are also used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding symbol is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. By executing the normal symbol process, the display control of the normal symbol display 10 and the open / close control of the variable winning ball device 15 are executed.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command or the like related to display control of decorative symbols in the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol command control processing: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S31). Specifically, payout control is performed in response to detection of a winning based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a drive command is issued to the solenoid circuit 59 (step S32: output process). The solenoid circuit 59 drives the solenoids 16 and 21 in accordance with a drive command to open the variable winning ball device 15 or the opening / closing plate 20 in an open state or a closed state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the change speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  12 and 13 are flowcharts showing an example of the power-off process in step S20. In the power-off process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is turned on) (step S490). If not on, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM 55 is cleared to 0 (step S491). If it is ON, the value of the backup monitoring timer is increased by 1 (step S492).

  Next, if the value of the backup monitoring timer coincides with a determination value (for example, 2) (step S493), the game control microcomputer 560 clears the winning cumulative number counter (step S493A). The cumulative winning number counter is a counter for counting the cumulative number of game balls won in the second start winning opening 14 when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in a state other than the open state. In this embodiment, the winning cumulative number counter is used when determining an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14, as will be described later. In this embodiment, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the second start winning opening 14 being in the open state) means that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is physically open. And a state from when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is physically closed until a predetermined interval period (for example, 1 second) elapses.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes power supply stop processing after step S494, that is, preparation processing for stopping power supply. That is, the state shifts from the state in which the progress of the game is controlled to the state in which the power supply stop process (the power-off control process) for saving the game state is executed. Note that “formed in the RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  By using the backup monitoring timer and the determination value, if the power-off signal is kept on for a time corresponding to the determination value, the power supply stop process is started. That is, even when the power-off signal is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like, the power supply stop process is not erroneously started. Note that the value of the backup monitoring timer is stored by the backup power source for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Therefore, in step S8 in the main process, it is possible to confirm that the processing result of the power supply stop process is stored because the value of the backup monitoring timer is the same value as the determination value.

  In the power supply stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 creates parity data (steps S494 to S503). That is, first, the clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area (step S494), and the checksum calculation start address corresponding to the start address of the RAM area where the contents should be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set in the pointer. (Step S495). Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the final address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set (step S496).

  Next, an exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated (step S497). The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area (step S498), the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S499), and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1 (step S500). Then, the processes in steps S497 to S500 are repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0 (step S501).

  When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 560 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area (step S502). Then, the inverted data is stored in the checksum data area (step S503). This data becomes parity data to be checked when the power is turned on. Next, an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (step S511). Thereafter, the built-in RAM 55 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the head address of the port clear setting table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S512). In the port clear setting table, the number of processes (the number of output ports to be cleared) is set to the head address, and then the output port address and output value data (clear data: the value of the off state of each bit of the output port) However, the output ports for the number of processes are sequentially set.

  The game control microcomputer 560 loads data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the number of processes) (step S513). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S514), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the output port address) is loaded (step S515). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S516), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, output value data) is loaded (step S517). Then, the output value data is output to the output port (step S518). Thereafter, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S519), and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S514. If the number of processes is 0, that is, if all the output ports to be cleared are cleared, the timer interrupt is stopped (step S521) and the loop process is started.

  When the power supply is stopped by the above process, the power supply stop process in steps S494 to S521 is executed, and data indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed (backup monitoring having a determination value). Timer and checksum) are stored in the backup RAM, RAM access is disabled, the output port is cleared, and timer interrupt for executing the game control process is set to disabled.

  In addition, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (when it is confirmed that the power-off confirmation signal is in the on state), the gaming control microcomputer 560 clears the winning cumulative number counter. Therefore, it is possible not to accumulate the number of winnings over a longer period than necessary, and to reliably detect an abnormality in winning due to an illegal act on the variable winning ball device 15. In addition, the cumulative number of winnings can be cleared by turning off the power of the gaming machine, and the abnormality notification can be easily reset.

  FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of the special symbol process (step S27) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 is executed.

  When performing the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first start port switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning port 13 provided in the game board 6. If it is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning opening 13 has occurred (step S311), the reserved memory number (start winning memory number) becomes the upper limit value (held memory number = 4). It is confirmed whether it has reached (step S312).

  When the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit (N in step S312), the game control microcomputer 560 extracts software random numbers (such as a counter value for generating a big hit determination random number, etc.) Is stored in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter as the extracted random number value (step S313). Extracting a random number means reading a count value from a counter for generating a random number and setting the read count value as a random value. In step S313, random 1 to random 4 are extracted from the above random numbers. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the reserved memory counter indicating the reserved memory number by 1 (step S314). Although not shown in FIG. 14, when the value of the pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, the start prize memory designation command (the start prize memory designation command at this time is the number of start prize memories due to the occurrence of the start prize). Is a command indicating that +1 has been added).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560, if the second start port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the second start winning port 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on, that is, If a start winning that causes the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 has occurred (step S315), it is confirmed whether or not the reserved memory number (start winning memory number) has reached the upper limit value (held memory number = 4). (Step S316).

  When the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit (N in step S316), the game control microcomputer 560 uses software random numbers (counter values for generating big hit type determination random numbers, etc.) and random R ( The big hit determination random number) is extracted, and a process of storing them in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved memory number counter as the extracted random number value is executed (step S317). Also in step S317, the game control microcomputer 560 extracts random numbers 1 to 4 as software random numbers, and also extracts random R by reading the count value of the random number circuit 503 as hardware random numbers.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the reserved memory counter indicating the number of reserved memories by 1 (step S318). At this time as well, a start winning memory designation command (a start winning memory designation command at this time is a command indicating that the number of start winning memories is incremented by one due to the occurrence of the start winning) is transmitted.

  Thereafter, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag).

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): When the microcomputer 560 for game control is in a state where variable symbol special display can be started, the number of numerical data stored in the reserved memory buffer (the number of reserved memories) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the hold storage counter. Then, if the count value of the holding storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit (whether or not the display result of the variable symbol special display is the specific display result). In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set, and the type of big hit (non-probable big hit, probable big hit, sudden probable big hit, etc.) is determined. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): For determining a variation pattern that is extracted when a variation pattern of variable display of a special symbol (effect mode during symbol variation: variation time is also specified by the variation pattern) is generated at the time of start winning. Selection is made from among a plurality of types of variation patterns determined in advance according to the value of a random number (one of display random numbers). Further, based on the determined variation pattern, after setting the variable display time (variation time) until the special symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the special symbol process timer, the special symbol process timer is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S302.

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed. The value is updated according to step S303.

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): The variable symbol display on the special symbol indicator 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for designating the stop of variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9 is transmitted to the effect control board 80. If the jackpot flag is set, the time from when the jackpot symbol is stopped until the jackpot game starts (the jackpot display time) is set in the jackpot control timer, and then the jackpot control timer is started. Let In addition, the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control command (fanfare command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute a signal effect (fanfare effect) indicating that the jackpot game is to be started after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Send. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S304. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S300.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S304): When the big hit display time has elapsed, control for opening the large winning opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305.

  Processing for opening a special prize opening (step S305): A process for confirming the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. In addition, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S306.

  Post-winner opening process (step S306): When the interval time has elapsed, it is confirmed whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305. On the other hand, when all rounds are finished, an effect control command (ending command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform an effect (ending effect) for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is issued. After transmitting to the effect control board 80 and setting the execution time of the big hit end process (big hit end time) in the big prize opening control timer, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S307.

  Big hit end process (step S307): A predetermined flag set / reset process for ending the big hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 80. In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration. The first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16, commands 8000 (H) to 8080 (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start.

  Commands 8C00 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands for designating the contents of the stop symbols (display results) of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, commands 8C00 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as symbol information designation commands.

  The command 8C00 (H) is an effect control command (outgoing designation command) for designating that the stop symbol (display result) of the special symbol is determined as the offcoming symbol. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary big hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been decided as a non-probable variation symbol (that is, a non-probability variation big hit (also referred to as a normal big hit)). ).

  The command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command (designated to specify that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol (that is, a probable variation big hit is determined), and that it is determined not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts. 1 specified command per probability variation. Command 8C03 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit 2 designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided as the probability varying symbol and that it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit game. Command 8C04 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probable variable symbol and that it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is finished (during the ending effect) 3 designation command).

  Command 8C05 (H) is an effect control command (suddenly probable big hit designation command) for designating that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been suddenly determined to be a probable change symbol (that is, that it has been determined to be suddenly probable big hit).

  Here, the “re-lottery effect” refers to an effect that makes it appear that the jackpot symbol is re-lotted and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9. Specifically, when it is determined in advance that the jackpot symbol (non-probability variable symbol or probability variable symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9, the variable display device 9 displays the left, middle and right decorative symbols. This is an effect of deriving and displaying a jackpot symbol (non-probability variation symbol or probability variation symbol) after stopping display with the same non-probability variation symbol and then re-variation of the non-probability variation symbol (see FIG. 118). The re-lottery effect includes a case where a non-probable variable symbol is promoted to a probable variable symbol (when a non-probable variable symbol is displayed after being stopped), and a case where a non-probable variable symbol is not promoted to a probable variable symbol (a non-probable variable symbol is displayed). When the non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed again after the stop display. The re-lottery effect that promotes a non-probable variable symbol to a probabilistic symbol is called “promotion effect” or “rising effect”.

  In this embodiment, the timing for executing the re-drawing effect is “during symbol change”, “during big hit game”, “after big hit game is over”. When the game control microcomputer 560 causes the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute a re-lottery effect during “change in design”, the game control microcomputer 560 specifies execution of the re-lottery effect with a change pattern command. Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 causes the production control microcomputer 100 to execute the re-lottery effect “during the big hit game” or “after the big hit game is finished”, the “in jackpot game” is executed by the symbol information designation command. Alternatively, the execution of the re-drawing effect “after the end of the big hit game” is designated. The effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect at a predetermined timing based on the contents of the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for designating stop of variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Commands 9500 (H) to 9502 (H) are effect control commands (background designation commands) for designating background display according to the gaming state in the variable display device 9. Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the normal gaming state. The command 9501 (H) is an effect control command (high probability state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the probability variation state (high probability state). The command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the time-short state.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating display during the customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A000 (H) to A004 (H) are effect control commands (fanfare designation commands) for designating that a big hit game is started. Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 1 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) is determined. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 2 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the big hit game is started. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 3 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that a probability variation big hit is determined and a re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 4 designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot when it is decided that a re-lottery effect is to be executed after the jackpot game is determined and the re-lottery effect is executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect) ). Command A004 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 5 designation command) that designates the start of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in the 15 round jackpot game. The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the 15 round big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set.

  Commands A301 (H) to A305 (H) are effect control commands (ending designation commands) that designate the end of the big hit game. The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (ending 1 designation command) for designating the end of the normal jackpot game (displaying that the game will shift to the short time state after the jackpot game is finished). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of jackpot when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the jackpot game is started. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the big hit when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A304 (H) is an effect control command (ending 4 designation command) that is promoted to a probable variation symbol in the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game (during the ending effect) and designates that it will be a promising big hit. Command A 305 (H) is an effect control command (ending 5 designation command) for designating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  Command A4XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in a two-round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). Command A5XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the two round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). In “XX”, the number of rounds is set.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command) for designating the number of starting winning memories shown by XX.

  Commands D000 (H) and D001 (H) are production control commands (abnormal winning notification designation commands) for instructing abnormal winning notification. In this embodiment, the abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted when an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 is detected or when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening is detected. The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification 1 designation command) for instructing an abnormal winning notification based on detection of an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14. The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification 2 designation command) for instructing an abnormal winning notification based on the detection of an abnormal winning at the special winning opening.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, the contents shown in FIGS. Accordingly, the display state of the variable display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls that is a big hit on the variable display device 9, an effect control command for designating the count number of the count switch 23 is also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  18-20 is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern used by this embodiment. 18 to 20, “S” of “line” indicates that single reach (one of 1UH to 8UH, 1LH to 8LH, 1CH to 8CH in FIG. 3) is established, and “W” of “line”. Indicates that double reach (any one of 1WH to 8WH in FIG. 3) is established, and “S & W” of “line” indicates that either single reach or double reach is established.

  In this example, each variation pattern is a variation pattern in the case where the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is “out-of-order symbol” when it is normal (including the probability variation state when it is not in the short-time state), Fluctuation pattern (decrease pattern other than the dedicated pattern in the figure) when the decorative symbol stop symbol (stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop before jackpot) is “non-probable variation” or “probability variation” during normal operation )), And the decorative pattern stop pattern (stop pattern at the time of fluctuation stop before the big hit) becomes a “probable variable pattern” in the normal state (variation pattern dedicated to the normal variable variable big hit) and the decorative pattern stop pattern The fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern dedicated to normal big hit during normal times) when the (stop pattern at the time of fluctuation stop before the big hit) is “non-probable variation” during normal times, and the stop pattern of the decorative symbol is “ Natural and variable pattern in the case of a probability variation pattern "(suddenly probability variation jackpot dedicated fluctuation pattern during normal), are distinguished.

  In addition, each variation pattern includes a variation pattern (a variation pattern dedicated to deviation from time, time, and short) when the stop symbol of the decoration pattern is "shortage symbol" when the time symbol is short or short (including the short time state when certain changes occur). Change pattern when the symbol stop symbol (stop symbol at the time of variable stop before big hit) becomes "non-probable variable symbol" or "probable variable symbol" in the short time (variable pattern other than special pattern in the diagram) )), The decorative pattern stop pattern (stop pattern at the time of fluctuation stop before the big hit) becomes a "probable variable pattern" in a short time, and the decorative pattern stoppage of the decorative pattern Variation pattern when the symbol (stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop before big hit) becomes “non-probable variation” in the short time (fluctuation pattern dedicated to normal big hit in the short time medium), and stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “suddenly certain in the short time” The variation pattern in the case of a pattern "(suddenly probability variation jackpot dedicated fluctuation pattern during the time-shortening), are distinguished. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number “2” is a fluctuation pattern for both normal time and short time.

  “Normal fluctuation” (variation numbers “1” to “3”) in the figure is a fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation without reach. “Normal” (variation patterns “4” to “8”, “42” to “50”) in the figure is a variation pattern with normal reach (simple reach mode). In the figure, “Muchi”, “Replacement”, “Replacement Rock”, “Rock”, “Suspension Bridge”, and “Minecart” represent the types of reach. These reach are super reach.

  Here, “normal reach” refers to the case where the middle symbol changes rapidly after the reach is established, the change rate / direction of the middle symbol changes after the reach is established, or after the reach is established. There are cases where a character appears or the background changes after reach is established. However, in the case of normal reach, the mode of production is relatively simple. On the other hand, “super reach” combines a plurality of effects of normal reach, develops from normal reach to another effect, or executes an effect with a story. In the case of super reach, an effect that makes it possible to expect a big hit than normal reach is performed. In general, the fluctuation time is set longer in the super reach than in the normal reach.

  In addition, the “chance eyes” in the figure is a variation pattern that develops into super reach after the chance eyes in the production are temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, when a double reach is established, the symbol that comes first (for example, “1” when the symbol “1” or “2” is double-reached “1”) is a big hit (“first”), and later The variation pattern of the same content is divided in the case of a big hit (“later hit”) in the coming symbol (for example, “2” when double reach is achieved with the symbols “1” and “2”).

  In addition, “relief” in the figure indicates a variation pattern in which a “relief” effect is executed and a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed after a symbol that is out of reach and displayed temporarily stopped.

  In addition, “treasure chest”, “jump”, “floor falling”, and “appearance of enemy” also represent the types of super-reach in the fluctuation pattern in the short time. Even during the short time, a fluctuation pattern for super-reach (trolley reach) of “Minecart” is prepared.

  The “special symbol” in the figure is a variation pattern used when the display result is a sudden probability variable symbol (31T to 33T, 35T to 55T) that reaches the special symbol shown in FIG. Is shown. In addition, these fluctuation patterns change normal reach or super reach (reach with special symbols).

  Although not shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, a predetermined variation time is preset for each variation pattern, and the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation time together with the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command. Is possible. In addition, the second byte of EXT data in the 2-byte effect control command is assigned to each variation pattern. For example, “00 (H)” is assigned as the “EXT data” to the variation pattern of the variation number 1, and “80 (H)” is assigned as the “EXT data” to the variation pattern of the variation number 129. The effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes the content (variation number) of the variation pattern from the “EXT data” assigned to the variation pattern command.

  21 to 23 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 can start the variation of the special symbol (when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, that is, the special symbol indicator If the special symbol variation display is not performed in step 8 and the game is not in the big hit game (step S51), the start winning memory number (holding memory number) is confirmed (step S52). Specifically, the count value of the hold storage counter is confirmed.

  If the starting winning memory number is not 0, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = 1 is read and stored in the random number storage buffer of the RAM 55 (step S53), and the starting winning memory number 1 is reduced by 1 and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the start winning memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = n−1.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the current game state (normal game state, probability change state, short time state, short time state of probability change, etc.), and uses the address of the background designation command transmission table corresponding to the game state as a pointer. Set (step S55). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (FIG. 36) described later (step S56). If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a normal state background designation command is transmitted. If the current game state is a probability change state, a probability change state background designation command is transmitted. If the current gaming state is a short-time state or a probable change short-time state, a short-time state background designation command is transmitted. In this embodiment, a common background designation command is transmitted in order to perform an effect common to the time-short state in the probability variation time-short state. However, when different effects are performed in the time-short state and the probability variation time-short state (for example, which For example, when performing a story with one side), each may be a separate command.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S57), and executes the jackpot determination processing module (step S58). The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a jackpot determination value determined in advance with a random number value for jackpot determination and determining that the jackpot determination value is a jackpot if they match. Here, in the jackpot determination, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state, probability change short state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal game state and short time state). It is comprised so that it may become. Specifically, a high-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and a low-probability jackpot determination table in which the number of jackpot determination values is set smaller than the high-probability jackpot determination table are provided. Keep it. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the high probability jackpot determination table to perform the jackpot determination process. If the gaming state is a low probability state, a big hit determination process is performed using a low probability big hit determination table. With such a configuration, the probability of a big hit is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

  Whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state and probability variation time short state) is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag indicating that the game state is the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state is set. Is done.

  If the big hit determination module determines that the big hit is not made (N in step S59), the game control microcomputer 560 proceeds to the process in step S64 in FIG.

  When it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination module (Y in step S59), a big hit flag is set (step S60). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot type determining random number from the random number storage buffer (step S61), and hits the jackpot type (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, probability variation jackpot, jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect during the jackpot game) After the game is over, a process of determining a probability variation big hit for executing a re-lottery effect or a sudden probability variation big hit) is executed (step S62).

  The jackpot type determination process is performed using a jackpot type determination table as shown in FIG. In the jackpot type determination table, a predetermined number of jackpot type determination random number values are distributed in advance for each jackpot type. The game control microcomputer 560 determines the jackpot type, that is, the big jackpot, the normal jackpot, the probable big jackpot, the probable big jackpot (promoting big jackpot), the probable big jackpot (ending) depending on which range the random number value for determining the big jackpot read in step S61 belongs. Promotion) and sudden probable jackpots. In this way, by determining the big hit type, not only whether the big hit is a normal big hit, a probable big hit, or a sudden probable big hit, whether to execute a re-lottery effect (promotion effect) and what kind of re-lottery effect It is also determined whether to execute at the timing.

  Although not shown in FIG. 21, only one type of jackpot symbol is provided according to the jackpot type, so that the jackpot symbol is automatically determined by determining the jackpot type. Specifically, the non-probability variable symbol “6” is determined for a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the probabilistic variable symbol “7” is determined for a probable big hit, and the sudden probable symbol “5” for a sudden probable big hit. Will be determined.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores (stores) the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S62 in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S63), and proceeds to the processing of step S72 of FIG. .

  In step S63, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S29, FIG. 35) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 36) is executed, and command transmission processing (FIG. 37) is executed. Thus, a symbol information designation command (normal jackpot designation command, probability variation big hit 1 designation command, probability variation big hit 2 designation command, probability variation big hit 3 designation command, sudden probability variation big hit designation command) corresponding to the big hit type is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  In step S64 of FIG. 22, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out the design symbol random number (one of the display random numbers) from the random number storage buffer (step S64), and based on the read out design symbol random number value. Then, a process of determining a special symbol off symbol is executed (step S65). One of the symbols “0” to “4”, “8”, and “9” is determined as the special symbol loss symbol.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the decorative symbol information corresponding to the loss in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S66). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S67).

  In step S72 of FIG. 23, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the jackpot type determined in step S62 is a probability variation jackpot (including a sudden probability variation jackpot). If it is not a probability variation jackpot (step S72). N), without setting the flag indicating the type of jackpot, the process proceeds to step S82.

  When the probability variation big hit is found (Y in step S72), the probability variation big hit flag indicating that the probability variation big hit occurs is set (step S73). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation jackpot is a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S74). If it is a sudden probability change big hit (Y in step S74), a sudden probability change flag indicating that a sudden probability change big hit occurs is set (step S75), and the process proceeds to step S82.

  If it is not suddenly a promising big hit (N in Step S74), it is checked whether a re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started (Step S76). If the re-lottery effect is not executed after the big hit game is started (N in step S76), the process proceeds to step S82. If the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started (Y in step S76), the big hit game is started. A re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect will be executed later is set (step S77), and it is confirmed whether the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (step S78). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (Y in step S78), the big hit execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big win is set (step S79), and the process proceeds to step S82. To do. When it is not executed during the big hit (N in Step S78), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Step S80). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Y in step S80), an ending execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending is set (step S81), and the process proceeds to step S82. . In step S82, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S82).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S201). When the time reduction flag is not set (N in step S201), a normal pattern determination process (step S202) is executed. When the time reduction flag is set (N in step S201), a time reduction pattern determination process (step S203) is executed.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern determination process (step S202) in the variation pattern setting process. In the normal pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S211). When the big hit flag is set (Y in step S211), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the sudden probability change flag is set (step S212). If the sudden probability change flag is set (Y in step S212), since a sudden probability change big hit will occur, it is decided to use the normal sudden change variation pattern determination table (step S213).

  In the variation pattern determination table for normal sudden probability variation, variation patterns (variation numbers “126” to “133”) selected in the normal sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 20 are set in advance. A plurality of judgment values are assigned to.

  When the probability change flag is not suddenly set (N in step S212), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability change big hit flag is set (step S214). When the probability variation big hit flag is set (Y in Step S214), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set (Step S215). When the probability variation jackpot flag is set and the re-lottery execution flag is not set (N in step S215), a probability variation jackpot that does not execute the re-lottery effect is generated after the big-hit game starts. It is determined to use the variation pattern determination table (step S216).

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal probability big hit, the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers “42” to “100” (normal big hit dedicated patterns shown in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20) are selected in advance. Excluding)) is set, and a plurality of judgment values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  When the probability variation big hit flag is not set (N in step S214), a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) occurs, so it is decided to use the normal normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S217). ). In addition, although the probability variation jackpot flag is set, if the re-lottery execution flag is also set (Y in step S215), a probability variation jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect after the big-hit game starts occurs. In this case, since a non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, it is usually necessary to select a variation pattern for jackpot. Accordingly, it is determined to use the normal normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S217).

  In the normal normal big hit variation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers “42” to “100” (probable variable big hit dedicated patterns shown in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20) selected in the normal normal big hit shown in FIGS. Excluding)) is set, and a plurality of judgment values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  When the big hit flag is not set in step S211 (N in step S211), it is determined to use the deviation variation pattern determination table for normal time (step S218).

  In the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (variation numbers “1” and “4” selected in the normal game state (including the probability variation state without time reduction) shown in FIG. ”To“ 41 ”), and a plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern. In the probability variation state, a variation pattern determination table for deviation at the time of probability variation in which variation patterns (variation numbers “2”, “4” to “41”) selected at the time of deviation at the time of probability variation are set is used.

  When the variation pattern determination table is determined in step S213, S216, S217, or S218, the game control microcomputer 560 ends the normal pattern determination process (step S202).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the time reduction pattern determination process (step S203) in the variation pattern setting process. In the time-shortening pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S221). When the big hit flag is set (Y in step S221), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the sudden probability change flag is set (step S222). If the sudden probability variation flag is set (Y in step S222), a sudden probability variation big hit will occur, so it is determined to use the short-term sudden probability variation pattern determination table (step S223).

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for sudden probability change at the time reduction, a variation pattern (variation numbers “134” to “137”) selected at the time of the sudden probability change big hit at the time reduction shown in FIG. 20 is set in advance. A plurality of judgment values are assigned to. It should be noted that, even in the short time state of probability change, the fluctuation pattern determination table for sudden time change is used.

  If the probability change flag is not suddenly set (N in step S222), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability change big hit flag is set (step S224). When the probability variation big hit flag is set (Y in Step S224), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set (Step S225). When the probability variation jackpot flag is set and the re-lottery execution flag is not set (N in step S225), a probability variation jackpot that does not execute the re-lottery effect after starting the jackpot game will occur. It is determined to use the variation pattern determination table (step S226).

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for time-varying probability change big hit, the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers “113” to “125” (excluding patterns usually dedicated to big hits)) shown in FIG. Is set, and a plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  When the probability variation big hit flag is not set (N in step S224), a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) occurs, so it is decided to use the short time normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S227). ). In addition, although the probability variation jackpot flag is set, if the re-lottery execution flag is also set (Y in step S225), a probability variation jackpot for executing the re-lottery effect after the big-hit game starts is generated. In this case, since a non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, it is usually necessary to select a variation pattern for jackpot. Therefore, it is decided to use the fluctuation pattern determination table for normal big hits in the short time (step S227).

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time big hits in the short time, the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers “112” to “123” (excluding patterns for exclusive use in the probable variable big hits)) previously selected in the normal big hit at the time short hours shown in FIG. Is set, and a plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  When the big hit flag is not set in step S221 (N in step S221), it is determined to use the shift variation pattern determination table for time reduction (step S228).

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation during time reduction, variation patterns (variation numbers “3”, “101” to “111”) that are selected when deviation occurs during time reduction shown in FIG. 20 are set in advance. A plurality of judgment values are assigned to. It should be noted that, even in the short time state of the probability change, the shift variation determination table for deviation is used for the short time.

  When the variation pattern determination table is determined in step S223, S226, S227 or S228, the game control microcomputer 560 ends the time-shortening pattern determination process (step S203).

  When the normal pattern determination process (step S202) or the short time pattern determination process (step S203) is finished, the process returns to the process of FIG. 25, and the game control microcomputer 560 reads and reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer. Based on the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern of the symbol is determined using the variation pattern determination table determined in step S202 or S203 (step S204). Specifically, the variation pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the variation pattern determination random value is determined as the variation pattern of the symbol to be variably displayed next.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the variation pattern command data corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S204 in the variation pattern buffer (step S205). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time in the special symbol process timer (step S206). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the address of the variable command transmission table in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S207). In response to this processing being performed, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed in the decorative symbol command control processing (step S29 in FIG. 11, FIG. 35). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the variation number monitoring process (step S208).

  In the fluctuation count monitoring process, the game control microcomputer 560 is changed to a short-time state (except for the short-time state at the time of probability change) after the big hit game ends (when the short-time flag is set), a special symbol after the big hit game ends. The number of fluctuations is counted with a fluctuation number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the count value of the fluctuation count counter has reached a value indicating a predetermined fluctuation count (for example, 100) that can continue the short-time state, and the count value is the predetermined fluctuation count. When the value becomes, the hourly flag is reset. As a result, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit game ends becomes a predetermined number of fluctuations, the time-shifted state is shifted to the normal gaming state.

  Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302) (step S209).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, first, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by -1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has timed out (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0) (step S352), and if it has not timed out (N in step S352), The process is terminated as it is. If the special symbol process timer has timed out (Y in step S352), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S303) (step S353).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and derives and displays the stop symbol (step S361). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the decorative symbol stop designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S362), and executes the command setting process (step S363). As a result, control for transmitting a decorative symbol stop designation command is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S364). If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S364), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the jackpot symbol in the jackpot control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot. The time from the display until the big winning opening is released (a big hit display time) is set (step S365). In the jackpot display time, an effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the jackpot game is started is executed.

  Note that different jackpot display times may be set for the big hit of 15 rounds and the big hit of 2 rounds. In this case, for example, the jackpot display time is 3 seconds for a big hit of 15 rounds, and the jackpot display time is 5 seconds for a big hit of two rounds.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the fanfare command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type to the pointer (step S366), and executes the command setting process (step S367). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed. For the big hit type, the probability change big hit flag is set, suddenly the probability change flag is set, the re-draw lotion execution flag is set, the big hit execution flag is set, or the ending execution flag is set It can be confirmed based on whether or not. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 clears the winning cumulative number counter (step S367A) and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big winning opening (step S304) (step S368). ).

  If the big hit flag is not set (N in step S364), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S369).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S304). In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (step S401), and confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 ( Step S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S402), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S402), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds or 2 rounds (step S403). ). If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, or if the probability variation jackpot flag is set but suddenly the probability variation flag is not set, it can be determined that the round is a big hit of 15 rounds. When the probability variation flag is set, it can be determined that the game is a big hit of two rounds.

  If it is a big hit for 15 rounds (Y in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command sending table for the 15 round big hits in the big prize opening opening command pointer to the pointer (step S404), and sets the command. Is executed (step S405). As a result, control for transmitting a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round) is executed. The number of rounds is recognized by checking the value of a round number counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S406). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, and the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the RAM area corresponds to the output state of the output port in step S406. Is set in accordance with the open / close state of the solenoid to be driven. Then, the contents set in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port in the output process of step S32 are output to the output port. As a result, a drive command signal is output from the output port to the solenoid circuit 59. The solenoid circuit 59 outputs a drive signal for driving the solenoid in response to a drive command signal to drive the solenoid. Hereinafter, in the process of opening and closing the solenoid, such an operation is performed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S407). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S407, in steps S404 and S405, when the value of the round number counter is 0, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round is transmitted. The process of S407 may be executed before the process of step S404, and when the value of the round number counter is 1, a command for opening a big prize opening indicating the first round may be transmitted.

  In addition, the maximum time (15-round round time) that can be opened in each round of the 15 round big hits is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S408). The round time for 15 rounds is, for example, 29.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S403 (N in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command winning table during the big winning opening release command for the two rounds big hit in the pointer (step S409). ), Command set processing is executed (step S410). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S411) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S412). In addition, the maximum time for which the big prize opening can be opened in each round in the big hit of two rounds (round time for two rounds) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S413). The round time for 2 rounds is a short time, for example, 5 seconds. Therefore, in the big hit of two rounds, ten game balls (the maximum number of game balls that can be won) will not win the big prize opening during the round. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process. In the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the special winning prize control timer by -1 (step S421). And it is confirmed whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds (whether it is a big hit of 15 rounds or a big hit of 2 rounds) (step S422).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S423). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S423), it is checked whether or not the game ball has won the big prize opening by checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. Confirmation is made (step S424). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S424), the process is terminated as it is. If the count switch 23 is on (Y in step S424), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter that counts the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S425). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S426). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in step S426), the process is ended as it is.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S423) or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S426), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S427). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S428).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command transmission table after opening the big winning opening for 15 rounds big hit to the pointer (step S429), and executes the command setting process (step S430). As a result, control for transmitting a command after opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds that specifies a display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round) is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time (interval time for 15 rounds) from the end of the round to the start of the next round in the big win of 15 rounds in the big prize opening control timer ( In step S431), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 15 rounds is, for example, 5 seconds.

  If it is a big hit of two rounds (N in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (step S433), and the value of the big prize control timer If is not 0 (N in step S433), the process is terminated as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S433), the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the big prize opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S434).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the display command transmission table after the two-round big winning opening is opened to the pointer (step S435), and executes the command setting process (step S436). As a result, the control for transmitting a command after opening the big winning opening for two rounds for specifying the display state according to the number of rounds after the opening of the big winning opening (after the end of the round) is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the time from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time for two rounds) in the big winning prize control timer (two rounds). In step S437), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 2 rounds is the same as the interval time for 15 rounds, for example, 5 seconds.

  FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) in the special symbol process. In the post-opening process for the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S441), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 or not. (Step S442). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S442), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S442), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of rounds is 15 rounds (15 rounds or 2 rounds Is determined (step S443).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15 (step S444). If the value of the round number counter is not 15 (N in Step S444), the address of the command transmission table for the 15 round round big prize opening open command transmission table is set in the pointer (Step S445), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S446). As a result, control for transmitting a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round) is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S447) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S448).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a round time for 15 rounds in the special winning opening control timer (step S449). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S450).

  If the value of the round counter is 15 (Y in step S444), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the ending command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type in the pointer (step S451), and sets the command Processing is executed (step S452). Thereby, control for transmitting an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the jackpot end time (execution time of the ending effect) for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot in the jackpot control timer (step S453), and sets the value of the special symbol process flag. The value is updated according to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S454).

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S443 (N in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S455 in FIG. 33). If the value of the round counter is not 2 (N in Step S455), the address of the command transmission table for the 2 round big hit big winning opening is set in the pointer (Step S456), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S457). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S458) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S459). Further, the round time for two rounds is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S460). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S461).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S455), the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly sets the address of the ending command transmission table for the probability variation big hit in the pointer (step S462), and sets the command. Processing is executed (step S463). As a result, the control for suddenly transmitting the ending command for probability variation big hit is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the jackpot end time in the big prize opening control timer (step S464), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S307) (step S307). S465).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit ending process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S471). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S472). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S472), the process is terminated as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S472), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a game state setting process after the big hit (step S473).

  In the game state setting process after the big hit, the process of setting / resetting the probability variation flag and the short time flag according to the game state after the end of the big hit game is executed. Specifically, when the gaming state shifts to the short-time state after the big hit game ends, only the short-time flag is set, and when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state after the big hit game ends, only the probability change flag is set. When the gaming state is shifted to the probability change time-short state after the game ends, the probability change flag and the time-short flag are set.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the jackpot flag (step S474). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset (step S475), and the sudden probability variation flag is set. In this case, the probability variation flag is suddenly reset (step S476). If the re-lottery execution flag is set, the re-lottery execution flag is reset (step S477). If the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit execution is executed. The flag is reset (step S478). Further, if the ending execution flag is set, the ending execution flag is reset (step S479).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S480).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol command control process (step S29). In the decorative symbol command control process, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer onto the pointer (step S551), and loads the data pointed to by the pointer (step S552). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is the timing for transmitting the variation pattern command, the address of the variation command transmission table is stored in the decoration symbol command transmission pointer in step S207 of the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process (step S27). The data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variable command transmission table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the variation pattern command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the variation pattern command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes command set processing. As a result, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 36) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer is changed from the address of the variable command transmission table to the symbol information designation command. This is the address of the transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. It has become. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the symbol information designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). As a result, control for transmitting a symbol information designation command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 36) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer starts from the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. This is the address of the storage designation command transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is transmitted to the start winning memory designation command. It is the address of the table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether it is the timing to transmit the start winning memory designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table. .

  When it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). Thereby, control for transmitting the start winning memory designation command is executed. The start prize memory designation command is an effect control command for designating (notifying) the current start prize memory number (holding memory number), and the reserved memory number is set as a value designated by the start prize memory designation command. . Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  In this case, when 1 is added to the address of the command transmission table in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 36) executed in step S554, the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command by the address indicated by the pointer. The address is not shown. Accordingly, in the decorative symbol command control process when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the decorative symbol command transmission pointer is loaded again into the pointer (step S551), and the data pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S552). Whether or not it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command is determined (step S553), but it is determined in step S553 that it is not the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing command set processing. As described above, the command set process is executed in steps S56, S363, S367, S405, S410, S430, S436, S446, S452, S457, S463, and S554. The command set process is a process including a command output process and an INT signal output process.

  In the command set process, the game control microcomputer 560 first loads the command data 1 pointed to by the address in the command transmission table (step S561), and executes (calls) the command transmission process shown in FIG. 37 (step S562). .

  In the command transmission process shown in FIG. 37, the game control microcomputer 560 first outputs a transmission command (effect control command) to the output port 1 (step S581). As a result, the MODE data of the first byte in the production control command having a 2-byte structure is output from the output port 1.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the effect control signal INT output bit in the port buffer (step S582), and loads the port 2 buffer (step S583). In this embodiment, for example, “1” is set in the port buffer as an effect control signal INT output bit, and data “0” in the port 2 buffer is loaded. Then, the logical sum of the port 2 buffer and the port buffer is calculated (step S584), and the calculation result is output to the output port 2 (step S585). In this embodiment, when the calculation result is “1”, an on-state (high level) effect control INT signal is output from the output port 2. In response to the output of the on-state effect control INT signal, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of receiving (capturing) a transmission command.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a predetermined value in the wait counter (step S586), and subtracts one by one until the value becomes 0 (steps S587, S588). This process is a process for setting the ON period (high level period) of the effect control INT signal. When the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (Y in step S588), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the port 2 buffer (step S589) and outputs the port 2 buffer to the output port 2 (step S590). As a result, an effect control INT signal in the off state (low level) is output from the output port 2.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a predetermined value in the wait counter (step S591), and subtracts one by one until the value becomes 0 (steps S592, S593). This process is a process for setting the off period (low level period) of the effect control INT signal. When the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (Y in step S593), the process returns to the command set process in FIG.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 36, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S563). Then, the address of the command transmission table is saved in the stack or the like (step S564).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 tests the work area reference designation bit (bit 7) of the command data 2 (step S565), and determines whether or not the value of the work area reference designation bit of the command data 2 is “0”. Is determined (step S566). If it is not 0 (N in step S566), the head address of the command extended data address table is set in the pointer (step S567), and the address is calculated by adding the value of bit 6 to bit 0 of the command data 2 to the pointer. (Step S568). Then, the data (command extension data) in the area pointed to by the address (pointer) is loaded (step S569).

  In the command extended data address table, EXT data (second byte data in a 2-byte effect control command) that can be sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 is sequentially set. Therefore, if the value of the work area reference designation bit is “1” by the above processing, the EXT data in the command extended data address table corresponding to the contents of the command data 2 is loaded, and the value of the work area reference designation bit is If "0", the contents of the command data 2 are loaded as they are. Even when EXT data is read from the command extension data address table, bit 7 of the data is “0”.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (calls) a command transmission processing routine (step S570). Therefore, by the processing shown in FIG. 37, the EXT data and the effect control INT signal are transmitted at the same timing as the transmission of the MODE data. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 restores the address of the command transmission table (step S571), and adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S572). When the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, if the address is the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command, as described above, the decorative symbol command control process performs the decorative symbol command control processing. If the transmission process (command set process) is executed and the address is not the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative design command, the decorative design command transmission process (command set process) is not executed in the decorative design command control process.

  As described above, the production control command having a 2-byte structure is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the rising of the effect control INT signal as the capture signal is detected, the effect control command capturing process is started. Before the capture process is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 A new signal is not output to the signal line. That is, reliable command reception processing is performed in the production control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 may start the effect control command capturing process at the fall of the effect control INT signal. Also, the polarity of the effect control INT signal may be reversed (it may be at a low level when instructing command capture).

  Next, the transmission timing of each effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. As shown in FIG. 38, every time a start winning occurs and variable symbol display is started on the special symbol display 8, the background designation command corresponding to the gaming state is displayed in the special symbol normal processing (step S300). Is sent. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), the type of jackpot is determined when the game is out of play, jackpot, or jackpot. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command designating the determined variation pattern is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S29). Subsequently, in the decorative symbol command control process (step S29), a symbol information designation command corresponding to the losing determined in the special symbol normal process and the big hit (big hit type) is transmitted, and further, a start winning memory designation command (this The start winning memory designation command at that time is a command indicating that the starting winning memory number has been decremented by −1 due to the start of fluctuation). In the example shown in FIG. 38, an effect control command for designating a variation pattern for jackpot is transmitted as a variation pattern command, and an effect control command for designating a big hit of 15 rounds as a symbol information designation command (designates sudden probability variation jackpot). It is assumed that an effect control command other than the command is transmitted. Then, the special symbol variation time is measured in the special symbol variation processing (step S302).

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 shows a variation pattern dedicated to a loss, a variation pattern dedicated to a probable jackpot, a variation pattern dedicated to a normal jackpot, and a variation pattern dedicated to a sudden probability variation jackpot. If it is a variation pattern command, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 is determined based on the command. On the other hand, if the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot, the variable display device 9 uses the symbol information designation command received thereafter. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped is determined.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 based on the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, when the execution of the re-lottery effect is designated by the received variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect during the variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether it is a big hit or a big hit based on the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, and if it is a big hit, checks the big hit type and executes the re-lottery effect. Also check the presence and timing of execution.

  In the special symbol stop process (step S303), when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted. When receiving the decoration symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the already determined decoration symbol stop symbol.

  If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted in the special symbol stop process (step S303). Based on the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a fanfare effect informing the start of the big hit game on the variable display device 9.

  In the big prize opening pre-processing (step S304), when the jackpot display time elapses, the big prize opening is opened, and a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the first round display is transmitted. The The production control microcomputer 100 displays the round display of the first round on the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the round time elapses in the process for opening the special prize opening (step S305), the special prize opening is closed, and a command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds specifying the interval display after the first round is transmitted. The The production control microcomputer 100 displays an interval display on the variable display device 9 until the next round (second round) is started based on the command after the big winning opening is opened from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the interval time elapses in the post-opening process for the special winning opening (step S306), the special winning opening is opened and a command for opening the special winning opening for 15 rounds specifying the round display of the second round is transmitted. . The production control microcomputer 100 displays the round display of the second round on the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  By repeatedly executing the process during opening of the special winning opening and the process after opening the special winning opening as described above, the round display of each round and the interval display between rounds are displayed, and the round advances in order. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game, it is repeated during a predetermined round (15th round in the example of FIG. 38). A lottery effect is executed.

  In the fifteenth round winning opening opening post-process (step S306), when the interval time has elapsed, an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted. On the basis of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes an ending effect informing that the jackpot game has ended on the variable display device 9. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), when it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending, the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (in the ending effect). In the example shown in FIG. 38, the re-lottery effect is also executed in the ending effect. The re-lottery effect may be executed a plurality of times after the big hit game is started, but in this embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started, it is always promoted to a probable big hit. It will be executed only once. Therefore, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery effect is not executed during the ending.

  Thereafter, in the big hit end process (step S307), when the big hit end time has elapsed, after the big hit game state setting process etc. is executed, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol change starts. Is done.

  FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when a two-round jackpot game (a game with a sudden probability change jackpot) is executed. As in the case shown in FIG. 38, every time a start prize is generated and variable symbol display is started on the special symbol display 8, the special symbol normal process (step S300) is performed according to the gaming state. A background specification command is sent. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), the type of jackpot is determined when the game is out of play, jackpot, or jackpot. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command designating the determined variation pattern is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S29). Subsequently, in the decorative symbol command control process (step S29), the symbol information designation command corresponding to the big hit (hit type) is transmitted, and the start winning memory designation command is further transmitted. The In the example shown in FIG. 39, it is assumed that an effect control command for designating a variation pattern for sudden probability change is transmitted as the variation pattern command, and an effect control command for designating sudden probability variation big hit is transmitted as the symbol information designation command. . Then, the special symbol variation time is measured in the special symbol variation processing (step S302).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 displays a decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 based on the fact that the change pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a change pattern command indicating a change pattern dedicated to the sudden probability change big hit. Determine the stop symbol.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 based on the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms that it is a sudden probability big hit based on the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. In the case of a sudden probability big hit, the re-lottery effect is not executed.

  In the special symbol stop process (step S303), when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted. When receiving the decoration symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the already determined decoration symbol stop symbol.

  When the stop symbol of the special symbol is a sudden probability variation symbol, a fanfare command designating the start of the sudden probability variation big hit is transmitted in the special symbol stop processing (step S303). The production control microcomputer 100 suddenly starts a probable big hit game based on the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560. Note that when a probable big hit game is suddenly started, a two-round effect is executed. The effects for two rounds are a series of special effects that are executed from the start to the end of the sudden change game. For example, when a probability variation symbol is suddenly stopped as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a special two-round effect that suddenly causes a character to appear or play a movie image is started. Then, when the effect for two rounds is finished, the effect mode shifts to a chance mode for notifying the transition to the probability change state.

  When the probability change big hit game is suddenly started, in the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304), when the big winning display time elapses, the big winning opening is opened and the display state at the first round is designated. A command for opening a big prize opening for two rounds is sent. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the round time elapses in the process for opening the big prize opening (step S305), the big prize opening is closed, and a command after opening the big prize opening for two rounds that specifies the display state after the first round is transmitted. Is done. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for the two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command after the special winning opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the post-opening process for the big winning opening (step S306), when the interval time elapses, the big winning opening is opened, and a two-round big winning big opening opening command specifying the display state at the second round is issued. Sent. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the second round big opening opening process (step S305), when the round time elapses, the big winning opening is closed and the big winning opening for two rounds big hit that specifies the display state after the second round is designated. A command is sent after release. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for the two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command after the special winning opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the post-opening process for the special winning opening after the second round (step S306), when the interval time elapses, an ending command for designating the end of the sudden probability change big hit is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Thereafter, in the big hit end process (step S307), when the big hit end time has elapsed, after the big hit game state setting process etc. is executed, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol change starts. Is done.

  In addition, during the round in the sudden probability big hit game, the opening time (round time) of the big prize opening is short. For this reason, since 10 game balls do not win the big winning opening, the big winning opening is not closed within the round time. Accordingly, since the time from the start to the end of the game is constant, the display control state of the effect for two rounds is not based on the presentation control microcomputer 100 receiving the command for opening the big prize opening or the command after opening the big prize opening. Can be switched. Therefore, in the sudden probability change big hit game, the process of transmitting the command for opening the big prize opening and the command after opening the big prize opening by the game control microcomputer 560 may not be performed.

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S28) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S111), the game switch microcomputer 560 performs a gate switch passage process (step S112). Run. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes any one of the processes shown in steps S100 to S103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Gate switch passage processing (step S112): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the count value of the gate passage memory counter (the number of gate passage memories) has reached the maximum value (in this example, “4”). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs processing for extracting the value of the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (ordinary symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of memory passing through the gate. .

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S100): The game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100) The normal symbol display 10 does not display the variation of the normal symbol, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not in the opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10). Confirms the value of the gate passing memory number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S101).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S101): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10, The normal symbol stop symbol display time is set in the symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S102).

  Normal symbol stop process (step S102): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol. To do. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory operating time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Further, it is confirmed whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state, and if it is a high base state, an opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) in the high base state is selected, If in the low base state, the release pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) in the low base state is selected, and the selected release pattern is set. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S103).

  Ordinary electric accessory actuating process (step S103): The game control microcomputer 560 wins a game ball to the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) on the condition that the normal symbol process timer has not timed out. The ordinary electric accessory winning count process for counting the number (the number of winnings to the second start winning opening 14) is executed, and the ordinary electric accessory is released with the set opening pattern (of the variable winning ball apparatus 15). (Open / close operation is executed) Normal electric accessory release pattern processing is executed. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S100).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step S100). In the normal symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step S121). If the gate passing memory number is 0 (Y in step S121), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S121), the game control microcomputer 560 reads out the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S122). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the gate passing memory number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S123). That is, the random number value for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the order of the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the normal symbol per-determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S124), and determines whether to win or not based on the read random number value (step S125). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for normal symbol determination matches the hit determination value, and if there is a matching hit determination value, it is determined to be a hit. For example, when the hour / short flag is set, that is, when the base state is high (short time state, short state when probability change), the hit determination value is any one of 1 to 10, and when the low base state, the hit determination value is 3 or 7 and so on. If the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated in a numerical range of 0 to 10, the winning probability in the high base state is 10/11, and the winning probability in the low base state is 2/11. As described above, the hit is made with a high probability in the high base state, and the win is made only with a low probability in the low base state.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol change time in the normal symbol process timer (step S126), and starts the normal symbol change in the normal symbol display 10 (step S127). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol at the time of the low base is 30.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol at the time of the high base is 1.0 seconds. . Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S101) (step S128).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (step S101). In the normal symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S131). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S131), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S135).

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (Y in step S131), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 ( Step S132). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer (step S133). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S102) (step S134).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step S102). In the normal symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S141). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S141), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S142).

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S141), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol ( Whether or not it is determined to be a win in step S125) is confirmed (step S143). Note that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is determined by, for example, setting the normal symbol per symbol determination flag when it is determined to be a winning symbol in step S125, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can do.

  When the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step S143), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer (step S144). The ordinary electric accessory operating time is the maximum time during which the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) can operate. The normal electric accessory operating time is set to be longer in the high base state than in the low base state. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the normal electric accessory operating time is set to 7 seconds in the high base state, and the normal electric accessory operating time is set to 1.5 seconds in the low base state.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the game state is a high base state or a low base state (step S145). Whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state can be confirmed by checking whether or not the time reduction flag is set. When the time reduction flag is set, it can be determined that the high base state is set, and when the time reduction flag is not set, it can be determined that the low base state is set. In the high base state, a high base state flag indicating the high base state is set, and whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state is determined depending on whether or not the flag is set. You may do it.

  When in the high base state (Y in step S145), the game control microcomputer 560 selects the release pattern set in the high base time table shown in FIG. S146). On the other hand, when in the low base state (N in step S145), the game control microcomputer 560 selects the release pattern set in the low base time table shown in FIG. (Step S147). In the example shown in FIG. 44, in the low base time table, opening pattern data in which the opening time is 0.5 seconds and the closing time is 1.0 seconds and the number of opening times is 1 is set. In this embodiment, in the low base state, as described above, the normal symbol process timer is set to 1.5 seconds as the normal electric accessory operating time, and the variable winning ball device 15 is once in 0.5 seconds. The symbol process timer normally times out when the closing time of 1.0 seconds elapses. In the example shown in FIG. 44, in the high base time table, an opening pattern data in which the opening time is 2.5 seconds, the closing time is 1.0 seconds, and the number of opening times is two is set. In this embodiment, in the high base state, as described above, the normal symbol process timer is set to 7 seconds as the normal electric accessory operating time, and after the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for 2.5 seconds, After the closing time of 1.0 seconds, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened again. When the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed again, and when the closing time of 1.0 seconds elapses, the normal symbol process timer times out. The closing time (1.0 seconds in this example) corresponds to a predetermined interval period. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variable winning ball apparatus between the state in which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is physically opened according to the opening time shown in the opening pattern shown in FIG. 44 and the closing time shown in the opening pattern. The state where 15 is closed corresponds to the open state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the release pattern selected in step S146 or S147 in the release pattern buffer (step S148). When the opening pattern is set in the opening pattern buffer, the opening pattern time (in this case, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set) is added to the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern timer (the timer for measuring the opening time and closing time of the ordinary electric accessory). The process of setting the closing time until the first opening is also performed. Thereafter, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S103) (step S149).

  In step S143, when it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but an off symbol (N in step S143), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the normal symbol normal flag. The value (specifically “0”) indicating the process (step S100) is updated (step S150).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory actuating process (step S103). In the normal electric actor operation process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S161). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S161), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S162).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the switch-on buffer into the register (step S163). The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when switch-on is detected, and 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch-off is detected.

  The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (corresponding bit of the second start port switch 14a) (step S164). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14). If 1 is not set in the second start port switch input bit (N in step S164), the process proceeds to step S168. If 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (Y in step S164), the second start port switch 14a is turned on, so that the game control microcomputer 560 is a normal electric accessory (variable). The number of the number of game balls won in the winning ball apparatus 15) is incremented by 1 (step S165). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is less than 8 (step S166). If the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is not less than 8 (N in step S166), that is, if it is 8 or more, the game control microcomputer 560 clears (sets to 0) the value of the normal symbol process timer. (Step S167). With this process, the ordinary electric accessory actuating process is completed (see Y in step S161, S172). Thus, in this embodiment, when eight or more game balls win the variable winning ball device 15 within the normal electric accessory operating time, the normal electric accessory operating process is terminated.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer by -1 (step S168). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer is 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer has timed out (step S169). If not timed out (N in step S169), the process is terminated as it is. If time-out has occurred (Y in step S169), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the release pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer (step S170). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 16 to open or close the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) (step S171).

  Specifically, when the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer times out when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, the release time is set as the release pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer, and the output port buffer (solenoid The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened by reversing the normal electric accessory solenoid output bit of the buffer). If the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer times out while the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is open, the normal electric accessory release pattern timer sets a closing time as an open pattern time, and the normal output port buffer (solenoid buffer) The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed by reversing the electric accessory solenoid output bit.

  Through the processes in steps S168 to S171 described above, an open pattern in the low base state and an open pattern in the high base state are realized. When the gaming state is in the low base state, the opening time is 0.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is one, so that, for example, 1.0 seconds from the start of the normal electric accessory activation process When the closing time elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 0.5 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. Further, when the gaming state is the high base state, the release time is 2.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is 2, so that, for example, 2.5 after the normal electric accessory actuating process is started. When the closing time of 2 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed, and again When the closing time of 2.5 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed and closed. Become.

  In step S161, when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S161), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S100) (specifically, Is updated to "0") (step S172).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports related to a switch for detecting a game ball in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 46, the bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0 include the count switch 23, the gate switch 32a, the winning port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a, the first start port switch 13a, and the second start, respectively. The detection signal of the mouth switch 14a is input. The input port 0 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG.

  Next, payout control commands (payout control signals) transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a payout control signal output from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer.

  The prize ball REQ signal is a signal that is in an output state (= ON state) when a prize ball number command is transmitted (that is, a trigger signal for a prize ball payout request). The award ball number signal is a signal (prize ball number command) output for designating the number of game balls (0 to 15) for which a payout request is made.

  FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of each control signal shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 48, the prize ball REQ signal and the 4-bit prize ball number signal are output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67 and to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. Entered. The output circuit 67 is installed on the main board 31 outside the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. 2 (not shown in FIG. 2). Further, on the payout control board 37, an output circuit 67 is provided in the preceding stage of the input port in the payout control microcomputer.

  FIG. 49 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output the payout control signal. As shown in FIG. 49, the winning detection switch (count switch 23, winning port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a, first starting port switch 13a, and second starting port switch 14a) has detected the winning of the game ball. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal and sets the output state of the prize ball number signal according to the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning. Specifically, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that a game ball has won a winning area provided in the gaming machine based on a detection signal from the winning detection switch, the gaming control microcomputer 560 calculates a predetermined number of winning balls. It is added to the content of the total number of winning balls stored in the backup RAM. When the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer becomes a non-zero value, the winning ball REQ signal is turned on, and the output state of the winning ball number signal is set in accordance with the number of winning balls to be paid out according to winning. Put it in a state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a, four prize balls are paid out, and any of the winning port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a is paid. When a game ball is detected, 7 prize balls are paid out. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are paid out. Further, as described above, since the prize ball number signal is composed of 4 bits, among the prize ball number signals of 00 (H) to 0F (H) expressed in 8 bits, the lower 4 bits are The signal is transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37 by the award ball number signal. Hereinafter, it may be expressed as “00 (H) to 0F (H) prize ball number signal”, but in reality, the prize ball number signal is represented by 8 bits. This corresponds to the lower 4 bits of 0F (H).

  Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number signal is transmitted by unidirectional communication in which the signal is transmitted only from the main board 31 toward the payout control board 37, but by bidirectional communication, A prize ball number signal may be transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37. When performing two-way communication, for example, the payout control microcomputer transmits an ACK signal (response signal) to the game control microcomputer 560 in response to reception of the prize ball REQ signal, or receives a prize ball number signal. An ACK signal indicating that the game has been performed is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the switch process (step S21) in the main process will be described. In this embodiment, when the ON state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is certainly turned on. Specifically, the switch process is activated every 2 ms, but if the switch is detected to be turned on in both the switch process activated at the present time and the switch process activated 2 ms ago, the switch process is surely performed. Determined to be on.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing each 1-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switching process. The port buffer before two times is a buffer in which the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (assumed to be 4 ms before) is stored. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (2 ms before) is stored. As described above, in the switch-on buffer, when a switch on is detected, 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch, and when a switch off is detected, 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch. It is a buffer. The previous data is a buffer area that is temporarily used when the switch process is executed. The previous-time port buffer, the previous port buffer, the switch-on buffer, and the previous data are formed in the RAM 55. Further, the bit arrangement of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times in advance corresponds to the bit arrangement of the input port 0. That is, information corresponding to each of the switch detection signals assigned to bits 0 to 7 shown in FIG. 46 is set in bits 0 to 7 of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times before.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a processing example of the switch processing in step S21 in the game control processing. In the switch process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the content of the previous port buffer to the previous data (step S331). Further, the exclusive OR of the contents of the port buffer and the previous data is taken twice before (step S332). Then, the result of the exclusive OR operation is set as the previous data (step S333). At this stage, in the previous data, the bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. In addition, the contents of the previous port buffer are set in the port buffer two times before (step S334).

  Then, input port 0 data is input (step S335), and the input data is set in the previous port buffer (step S336). The processes in steps S334 and S336 correspond to a preparation process when the switch process is executed next time (after 2 ms).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the data input from the input port 0 and the previous data (step S337). At this stage, in the previous data, a bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the previous port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. That is, among the detection signals of the seven switches, the bit corresponding to the detection signal changed from the state before 2 ms from the state before 4 ms (from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”). Is “1”. Therefore, when the logical product of the previous data and the data input from the input port 0 is taken in step S337, the bit that is “1” in the data input from the input port 0 and 2 ms before The bit whose state has changed from the state 4 ms before becomes “1”. That is, as a result of the logical product operation, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the current state is the on state and has been detected to have changed from the off state to the on state during the previous switch processing (2 ms before) is “ 1 ”. In other words, the bit corresponding to the detection signal that has changed from the off state to the on state and then detected the on state twice in succession is “1”. Note that “continuously twice” means “both the switch process executed at a certain time and the switch process executed 2 ms after the switch process”.

  The game control microcomputer 560 stores the result of the AND operation in the switch-on buffer (step S338). In the switch-on buffer, after changing from the off state to the on state, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the on state is detected twice consecutively is “1”. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can confirm that the detection signal of the switch corresponding to the bit which is “1” in the switch-on buffer is surely turned on. Note that “definitely” means that the ON state has been detected twice in succession, that is, it can be considered that the ON state has continued for 4 ms. It can be done.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S31. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S341) and a prize ball control process (step S342).

  In the prize ball number adding process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 53 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “7”) is set at the start address of the winning ball number table, and the switch input bit determination for each switch of the winning opening from which the winning ball is to be paid out by winning from the next address. The value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to the bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input (see FIG. 46).

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the award ball number adding process in step S341. In the winning ball number adding process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the start address of the winning ball number table in the pointer (step S271). Then, the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S272). Next, the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (step S273).

  Then, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S274), and the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit determination value) is calculated (step S275). . Further, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S276).

  If the calculation result in step S275 is not 0 (N in step S281), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the process proceeds to step S282. If the calculation result in step S275 is 0 (Y in step S281), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not on, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S279), and if the number of processes is 0 The process ends, and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S274 (step S280).

  In step S282, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the abnormal winning notification flag is set. The abnormal winning notification flag is set when it is determined in the abnormal winning notification processing described later that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 or the big winning opening has occurred (see steps S258A and S264C). The abnormal winning notification flag is a flag indicating that it has been determined that the abnormal winning notification is to be executed based on the determination that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 or the big winning opening has occurred. That is, in step S282, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be in an abnormal winning state by confirming whether or not the abnormal winning notification flag is set.

  If the abnormal winning notification flag is not set (N in step S282), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of prize balls) as the prize ball addition value. (Step S283), the prize ball addition value is added to the contents of the 16-bit total prize ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (Step S284). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S277 and S278). Then, the process proceeds to step S279.

  If the abnormal winning notification flag is set (Y in step S282), it is determined in the abnormal winning notification processing described later that it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 or the big winning opening. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 does not execute the control of adding the prize ball addition value to the total prize ball number storage buffer. That is, the prize ball payout based on the count switch 23 being turned on is not executed (the processing of steps S283 and S284 is skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S279.

  By executing the above processing, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that an abnormal winning state is entered to the second start winning opening 14 or the big winning opening (the abnormal winning notification flag is set). If so, execution of control for paying out the game ball is prohibited. Therefore, the payout for the illegal winning prize can be prohibited, and the illegal act on the variable winning ball apparatus 15 can be prevented. Further, when there is a possibility that the second start winning opening 14 has been won due to an illegal act, it is possible to prevent the game store from being disadvantaged by not paying out the winning ball based on the winning.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control processing in step S342. In the prize ball control process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (step S371). If the value is 0, the process ends. If it is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) (step S372). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S373). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value, the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S374). Then, the contents of the prize ball number buffer are set in the output port for outputting the prize ball number signal (step S375). Further, “1” is set to the bit of the prize ball REQ signal of the output port for outputting the prize ball REQ signal (step S376).

  A prize ball REQ signal is output by the processing of step S376. That is, the prize ball REQ signal is turned on (see FIG. 49). Further, a prize ball number signal is output by the process of step S375 (see FIG. 49). In this embodiment, the maximum prize ball command value is “15”. Therefore, a prize ball number signal designating the maximum number of payouts of “15” is transmitted to the payout control board 37.

  When the winning ball number signal is transmitted, the game control microcomputer 560 subtracts the contents of the winning ball number buffer (the winning ball payout number commanded to the payout control means) from the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer (step S377). ).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the ON period of the prize ball REQ signal. Specifically, an initial value is set in the wait counter (step S378). Then, the value of the wait counter is decremented by 1 until the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (steps S379 and S380). When the value of the wait counter reaches 0, the on period is terminated.

  That is, “0” is set to the bit of the prize ball REQ signal of the output port for outputting the prize ball REQ signal (step S381), and 00 (H) is set to the output port for outputting the prize ball number signal. (Step S382).

  When the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37 receives the prize ball number signal, it drives the ball payout device 97 so that the number of game balls specified by the prize ball number signal is paid out.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning notification process in step S23. In the abnormal winning notification process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether an abnormal notification prohibition flag is set (step S251). The abnormality notification prohibition flag is set in the main process executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S44 in FIG. 10). When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S255. If the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set, the value of the prohibition period timer set in step S45 is decremented by 1 (step S252). When the value of the prohibition period timer becomes 0, that is, when the prohibition period timer times out, the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset (steps S253 and S254).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more (step S255). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more (Y in step S255), the game is in the big hit game or the small hit game. If it is in such a state, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the big prize opening, so the process proceeds to the process of step S261 without performing the process of confirming the abnormal winning to the big prize opening.

  A state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 is a state where neither a big hit game nor a small hit game is played. In this state, if there is a game ball winning at the big winning opening, it can be determined that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, an abnormal winning confirmation process for the special winning opening shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 (N in step S255), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S256). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the content of the loaded switch-on buffer and the count switch input bit determination value (01 (H), see FIG. 53) (step S257). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 01 (H), that is, when the count switch 23 is on, the logical product operation result is 01 (H). When the count switch 23 is not turned on, the operation result of the logical product is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S258), it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred in the special winning opening, and an abnormal winning notification flag indicating that an abnormal winning is notified is set (step S258A), control is performed to transmit an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command to the effect control board 80 (steps S259 and S260). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S259), and executes the command setting process (step S260). On the other hand, if the result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S258), it is determined that no abnormal winning in the special winning opening has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S261.

  In step S261, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (step S261). The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 is a state where it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) is in the open state (when the variable winning ball device 15 is physically open). And when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is physically closed until a predetermined interval period elapses). If it is in such a state (Y in step S261), there is a possibility that the game ball may win the second start winning opening 14, so that an abnormal winning confirmation to the second starting winning opening 14 is not performed. The winning notification process is terminated.

  The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S261) is a state in which the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) is determined to be in a state other than the open state. If there is a game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 in such a state, there is a possibility that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, the abnormal winning confirmation process to the second start winning opening 14 shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S261), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S262). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the second start port switch input bit determination value (80 (H), see FIG. 53) (step S263). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 80 (H), that is, when the second start port switch 14a is on, the logical product operation result is 80 (H). When the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 0 (00 (H)).

  When the logical product is not 0 (N in step S264), the second start winning port 14 is in the state other than the open state (including the state of the predetermined interval period), but the second start This is a case where a game ball has won the winning opening 14. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the value of the winning cumulative number counter (step S264A), and whether the value of the winning cumulative number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 in this example). (Step S264B). If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, sets an abnormal winning notification flag (step S264C), and produces the effect control board 80. Then, control for transmitting an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is performed (steps S265 and S266). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S265), and executes the command setting process (step S266). On the other hand, if the result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S264) or if the value of the winning cumulative number counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (N in step S264B), an abnormality to the second start winning opening 14 is detected. It is determined that no winning has occurred, and the abnormal winning notification process is terminated without performing control for transmitting the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command.

  When the count switch 23 is turned on in the state where neither big hit game nor small hit game is performed by the above processing, an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command is transmitted. The abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is transmitted even when the second start opening switch 14a is turned on in a state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not opened and closed (the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state). Is done.

  In addition, the process of steps S251 to S253 prohibits the start of abnormality notification when the production control microcomputer 100 is performing initialization notification. The production control microcomputer 100 continues to execute the initialization notification until the period corresponding to the prohibition period has elapsed since the start of the abnormality notification.

  In the process of step S255, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning in the big winning opening has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag. Therefore, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. Further, as described above, since the big hit end process or the small hit end process is executed for a predetermined time after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 has won a big winning opening immediately before closing. The game ball is prevented from being detected by the count switch 23 after the value of the special symbol process flag returns to 0, and an error is not notified even though it is a regular winning. .

  Further, in the process of step S261, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 based on the value of the normal symbol process flag. Therefore, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. In addition, as described above, as a method of delaying the timing for determining an abnormal prize from the timing for closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set a predetermined time before the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. Is closed, and when the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, an abnormal winning determination is made. Therefore, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is won at the second start winning opening 14 immediately before closing. The game ball is prevented from being detected by the second start switch 14a after the value of the normal symbol process flag returns to 0, and an error is reported even though it is a regular winning. There is nothing.

  At the same time that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, and the abnormal winning determination is made after a predetermined time has elapsed since the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. May be. Also, in the determination of the abnormal winning to the big winning opening, the timing for determining the abnormal winning by the same method may be delayed from the timing for closing the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. The production control microcomputer 100 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the start interval of the effect control processing (step S701). Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to a loop process for confirming the monitoring of the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. Furthermore, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers (left design determination random number, right design determination random number, etc.) for determining the stop symbol of the decorative design is executed (step S706). . Further, a notification control process for performing notification using an effect device such as the variable display device 9 is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  58 to 61 are flowcharts showing the command analysis process (step S704) in the main process. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (background specifying command: 9500 (H) to 9502 (H)) for specifying the background in the variable display device 9 (Y in step S613), the effect control microcomputer 100 is used. Confirms the gaming state based on the content of the background designation command, and sets the confirmed gaming state in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S614). And the control which displays the background image according to a game state on the variable display apparatus 9 is performed (step S615).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 8080 (H)) that specifies a change pattern (step S616), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the command EXT. Data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S617), and a fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S618).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (step S619), and a variation pattern for both common big hit / probable variation big hit. If the change pattern command is not for designating (N in step S619), a dedicated pattern decoration design determination process is executed (step S620). The detailed contents of the dedicated pattern decoration design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 62). When the variation pattern command is for specifying a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (Y in step S619), the dual-purpose flag is set to indicate that the variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern for normal big hit / probable variation big hit is received. (Step S621).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (design information designation command: 8C00 (H) to 8C05 (H)) that designates symbol information (Y in step S622), the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the symbol information. A symbol information command reception flag indicating that the information designation command has been received is set (step S623). And it is confirmed whether the stop symbol of a decoration symbol has already been determined (step S624). Here, if the variation pattern command is not a command for designating a variation pattern for both a normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot, a stop symbol for the decoration symbol has already been determined in the dedicated pattern decoration symbol determination process. Therefore, it can be confirmed whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been determined depending on whether or not the dual-purpose flag is set.

  When the stop symbol of the decorative design has not yet been determined (N in step S624), the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a combined pattern decorative design determination process (step S625). The detailed contents of the combined pattern decoration design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 89). If the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined (Y in step S624), the process proceeds to step S626.

  In step S626, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number (step S626). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the symbol information designation command to specify that the non-probability variation symbol is promoted to the probability variation symbol by executing the re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts, that is, the probability variation big hit two designation command ( 8C03 (H)) or a probability variation big hit 3 designation command (8C04 (H)) is checked (step S627). If it is a symbol information designation command that designates promotion after the start of the big hit game (Y in step S627), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a re-lottery execution flag in accordance with the execution timing (step S628). Specifically, when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery execution flag during the big hit is set, and when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending, A lottery execution flag is set. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the probability variation symbol using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 93 according to the random number value extracted in step S626 (step S629). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect executed after the big hit game is started. Thereafter, the process returns to step S611.

  In the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2), among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 5SF, 7UF, 7LF, 7CF, 7SF, 8UF, 8LF, 8CF, 8SF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S626 as the probability variation symbol.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command: C0XX (H)) that designates the starting winning memory number (Y in step S630), the start winning memory display control process is executed (step S630). S631). The start winning memory display control process is a process for performing a control for displaying a display (start winning memory display) that can specify the start winning memory number in a predetermined area of the variable display device 9. In this process, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms the number of start winning memories based on the start winning memory designation command, and displays the confirmed number of start winning memories on the variable display device 9.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the start prize memory designation command is a start prize memory designation command for designating the start prize memory number -1 transmitted at the start of variation, that is, in the decorative symbol command control process. It is determined whether or not the start winning memory designation command is transmitted next to the symbol information designation command (step S632). Here, whether or not it is a start prize memory designation command for designating the start prize memory number −1, for example, in the start prize memory display control process, stores the start prize memory number designated by the start prize memory designation command. The determination can be made by checking whether or not the number of start winning memories specified by the next received start winning memory specifying command is -1. If it is not the start winning memory designation command for designating the starting winning memory number −1 (N in Step S632), the process returns to Step S611. If it is a start winning memory designation command that designates the starting winning memory number −1 (Y in step S632), the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S633). If the flag is set (Y in step S633), it indicates that the symbol information designation command has been normally received before the start winning memory designation command, and the process returns to step S611.

  If the symbol information command reception flag is not set (N in step S633), it indicates that the symbol information designation command has not been normally received before the start winning memory designation command. That is, it means that the symbol information designation command is missed in the production control microcomputer 100. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined in step S620 (step S634). If it has already been determined (Y in step S634), step S611 is performed. Return to processing. If the decorative symbol stop symbol has not yet been determined (N in step S634), a provisionally determined symbol determination process is executed (step S635). The tentatively determined symbol determining process is a process of tentatively determining a non-probable variable symbol when a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot is received but a symbol information designation command is missed. The detailed contents of the temporary determination symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 103).

  In addition to the case where the symbol information designation command is missed, if the symbol information designation command is not completely received, that is, the MODE data and the EXT data of the symbol information designation command cannot be received. Also included is a case of receiving a command that is not a symbol information designation command, such as a garbled command. For example, when the MODE data of the symbol information specifying command is garbled, a command that is not a symbol information specifying command (including a command that cannot be recognized by the production control microcomputer 100) is received, or the symbol information specifying command EXT is received. This is the case, for example, when an EXT data command (see FIG. 16) that is not defined as a symbol information designation command is received because the data is garbled.

  The EXT data of the symbol information specifying command is garbled. However, when a command defined as the symbol information specifying command is received, the symbol information specifying command is an inconsistent symbol information specifying command in the control process. It will be received. In this case, when the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes that the symbol information designation command has been received, the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S623), and the flag setting is confirmed in step S633 (step S623). There is a possibility that the provisionally determined symbol determination process may not be executed (Y in S633) (step S635). However, if the garbled symbol information designation command is a command other than the normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)) or the probable variation jackpot designation command (8C02 (H) to 8C04 (H)), the decorative symbol has not yet been determined. However, it is possible to determine that the variation pattern command and the symbol information designation command are not consistent with each other by receiving such a symbol information designation command (N in Step S634). In such a case, it is preferable to execute the temporary determination symbol determination process (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (fanfare command: A000 (H) to A004 (H)) that designates the start of a big hit (fanfare) (Y in step S636), the effect control microcomputer 100 will The fanfare reception flag corresponding to the content of the fanfare command is set (step S637). For example, depending on the contents of the fanfare command (such as the type of jackpot), a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a normal jackpot, a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a promiscuous jackpot (no re-lottering effect), a probability variable jackpot (re-lottery effect during a jackpot) A fanfare reception flag indicating the start of execution), a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of probability variation big hit (execution of re-lottery effect by ending), and a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of sudden probability change big hit are set.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a command non-reception flag indicating that the symbol information designation command has not been received is set (step S638). The command non-reception flag is set in the temporary determination symbol determination process (see step S686 in FIG. 103). At this time, if the command unreceived flag is set, it means that a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot has been received, but the symbol information designation command has not been received normally, and whether the probability variation jackpot or normal jackpot This means that the decorative symbol stop symbol has not been determined (a state where the decorative symbol stop symbol has been provisionally determined in the temporary determination symbol determination process).

  When the command non-reception flag is not set (N in Step S638), the process returns to Step S611. When the command non-reception flag is set (Y in step S638), it is confirmed whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit (excluding the sudden probable big hit) based on the fanfare reception flag or the like (step S639). If it is not a probable big hit (N in step S639), the process returns to step S611. When it is a probable big hit (Y in step S639), the production control microcomputer 100 executes a missed probable change symbol determination process for determining a probable variation symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol (step S640). The detailed content of the missed probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 104). When the command not received flag is set (when the symbol information designation command is not received), the probability variation symbol determined and stored in the probability variation symbol determination process at the time of missing is derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game Is the final stop symbol.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game based on the fanfare reception flag (step S641). Even if it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect, that is, even if the fanfare command for specifying the execution of the re-lottery effect is not received during the big hit or the ending (N in step S641), the re-lottery effect is performed. Must be executed. This is because when a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot is received but a symbol information designation command is not received, a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a temporary jackpot symbol in the provisional symbol determination process (see FIG. 103). ), Since the non-probable variation symbol has already been derived and displayed, if the true jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (excluding sudden probability variation jackpots), the probability variation symbol is re-established so as not to disadvantage the player. This is because it is necessary to derive and display the lottery effect. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts the execution timing determination random number (step S642), and determines the execution timing of the re-lottery effect according to the extracted value of the execution timing determination random number (step S643). Then, a re-lottery execution flag corresponding to the determined execution timing is set (step S645). Specifically, when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery execution flag during the big hit is set, and when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending, A lottery execution flag is set.

  On the other hand, when it is necessary to execute a re-lottery effect, that is, when a fanfare command specifying execution of a re-lottery effect is received during a big hit or ending (Y in step S641), the fanfare command is specified. The timing is determined as the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (step S644). Then, a re-lottery execution flag corresponding to the determined execution timing is set (step S645).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (ending command: A301 (H) to A305 (H)) for designating the end of the jackpot (ending) (Y in step S646), the effect control microcomputer 100 is Then, an ending reception flag corresponding to the content of the ending command is set (step S647). For example, depending on the content of the ending command (such as jackpot type), an ending reception flag indicating the end of a normal jackpot, an ending reception flag indicating the end of a promiscuous jackpot (no redrawing effect), a promising big hit (redrawing effect during a jackpot) An ending reception flag indicating the end of execution), an ending reception flag indicating the end of probability variation jackpot (execution of re-lottery effect by ending), and an ending reception flag indicating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command: 9000 (H)) (Y in step S648), the production control microcomputer 100 is an initial indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control to display the screen on the variable display device 9 is performed (step S649). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Also, an initial notification flag is set (step S650), and a value corresponding to the initial notification period value is set in the period timer (step S664). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of the initialization designation command. The production control microcomputer 100 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in step S45. Therefore, when the initialization notification is performed, the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command or the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command is not received.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (9200 (H)) (Y in step S665), the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a predetermined power failure recovery screen (the game state continues). (Screen for displaying information for informing the player that the player is playing) is controlled (step S666).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command (D000 (H)) (Y in step S667), the production control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag (step S668). ).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command (D001 (H)) (Y in step S669), the production control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag (step S670). ).

  If the received effect control command is another command (N in step S669), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S676). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a dedicated pattern decoration design determination process (step S620). In the dedicated pattern decoration design determination process, when the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern command dedicated to a detachment (Y in step S651), a detachment determination flag indicating that the detachment has been determined is set (step S652). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern with reach (step S653). If it is not a variation pattern with reach (N in step S653), the production control microcomputer 100 executes a reach-less loss determination process (step S654). The detailed contents of the reach-less losing determination process will be described later (see FIG. 63).

  If it is a variation pattern with reach (Y of step S653), the production control microcomputer 100 executes reach determination loss determination processing (step S655). The detailed contents of the reach loss determination process will be described later (see FIG. 72).

  When the variation pattern command is not the only variation pattern command for outliers (N in step S651) but is the variation pattern command dedicated to the probability variation big hit (Y in step S656), the production control microcomputer 100 indicates that the probability variation big hit has been determined. A probability variation big hit determination flag is set (step S657). Then, a dedicated pattern probability changing symbol determination process is executed (step S658). The detailed contents of the dedicated pattern probability changing symbol determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 83 and 84).

  If it is not a variation pattern command dedicated to a promiscuous jackpot (N in step S656) but a variation pattern command dedicated to a normal jackpot (Y in step S659), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the normal jackpot has been determined. The normal big hit determination flag shown is set (step S660). Then, an uncertain variable symbol determination process is executed (step S661). The detailed contents of the non-probable variable symbol determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 85 and 86).

  When it is not the variation pattern command dedicated to the normal big hit (N in Step S659) but the variation pattern command dedicated to the sudden probability variation big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 indicates that the sudden probability variation big hit indicating that the sudden probability variation big hit has been determined. A determination flag is set (step S662). Then, a sudden probability variation design determination process is executed (step S663). The detailed contents of the sudden probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 87).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing reachless loss determination processing (step S654). In the reach-less-losing determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is in the story mode (step S1001). In the normal production mode, the decorative lines are produced with five effective lines (upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, lower horizontal line, right-down line, and right-up line). In this embodiment, a story mode is prepared as an effect mode. During this story mode, an effect of developing a story is executed by the variable display device 9, and a big hit or a loss is notified by this story effect. The In the story mode, a decoration effect is performed with one effective line (the middle horizontal line) on the lower right of the variable display device 9 (see FIG. 119). That is, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are switched to an effect that varies by one line in the middle. In this embodiment, the story mode is controlled in the time-short state (including the probability change time-short state). In the process of step S1001, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game mode is in the story mode by determining whether or not the game state is the short-time state based on the game state set in step S614. Is determined (step S1001). When not in the story mode (N in step S1001), the left symbol determining random number is extracted (step S1002). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table (T-1) shown in FIG. 64 according to the extracted random number value (step S1003). In the left symbol selection table, as shown in FIG. 64, a plurality of determination values are allocated so that the ratio of displaying special symbols in each left symbol is high. The left symbol selection table (T-1) shown in FIG. 64 is a table for determining the middle symbol in the left display area of the variable display device 9. The number associated with each left symbol indicates the number of assigned judgment values. “Max67” indicates that the number of random values is 67 (0 to 66). Accordingly, in the left symbol selection table, the ratio at which the special symbol (“7 (white)” in the figure) is displayed in the middle of the left display area is 7/67. Also, since the ratio determined for the left symbol “*” before and after the special symbol is 7/67, the ratio at which the special symbol is displayed in the upper or lower part of the left display area is also 7/67, respectively. That is, the ratio that the special symbol is displayed in the left display area in the variable display device 9 is 21/67 as a whole, and the ratio that the special symbol is displayed is higher than the other left symbols. Specifically, “1” is displayed at 15/67, “2” is displayed at 11/67, “3” is displayed at 9/67, and “4” is displayed. The ratio for displaying 9/67, the ratio for displaying “5” is 10/67, the ratio for displaying “6” is 12/67, and the ratio for displaying “7” is 15/67. As described above, even in the case of losing without reach, there is a large proportion of special symbols appearing, so that the player can be expected to win a big hit, and the game performance can be improved. The number of random values is the same in other tables (for example, “max103” indicates that the number of random values is 103 (0 to 102)).

  The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value as the left symbol. The determined left symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a right symbol determining random number (step S1004). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the right symbol of the off symbol using the right symbol selection table (T-2) corresponding to the left symbol shown in FIG. S1005). In the right symbol selection table, as shown in FIG. 65, a plurality of determination values are assigned to a matrix of left symbols and right symbols. A plurality of right symbol selection tables are prepared for each left symbol already determined. For example, when the determined left symbol is “1”, the uppermost table in FIG. 65 becomes the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol “1”. The right symbol selection table (T-2) shown in FIG. 65 is a table for determining the middle symbol in the right display area of the variable display device 9.

  In the right symbol selection table (T-2), the number of determination values assigned to the same symbol as the determined left symbol is “0” in order to prevent reach. For example, when the determined left symbol is “7 (outlined)”, it is assigned to the right symbol “7 (outlined)” in the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol “7 (outlined)”. The number of determination values is “0”. When the left symbol is “*” (“*” between “7” and “7 (outlined)”), the upper symbol on the left display area is “7” and the lower symbol is “7”. (White) ”, the right symbol“ * ”(“ * ”between“ 6 ”and“ 7 ”) in which the upper symbol in the right display region is“ 7 ”, the upper symbol in the right display region The right symbol “*” (“*” between “7” and “7 (outlined)”), and the right display area where the symbol of “7 (outlined)” and the lower symbol is “7” The number of judgment values assigned to the right symbol “*” (“*” between “7 (white)” and “1”) where the lower symbol is “7 (white)” is “0”. It has become. In addition, the special symbol is suddenly determined to be more than the probable big hit by reach, but the right symbol selection table (T-2) is assigned a judgment value so that no reach occurs in this way. Can be prevented.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol determined in step S1003, and determines the symbol having the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1004 as the right symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1006). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the middle symbol selection table (T-3) or middle symbol selection table (T-3) shown in FIGS. 66 and 67 based on the left and right symbols determined in steps S1003 and S1005. T-4) is selected (step S1007). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the middle symbol selection table (T-3) or middle symbol selection table (T-4) selected in step S1007 in accordance with the extracted random number value, and the middle symbol of the off symbol is selected. Is determined and stored (step S1007). The middle symbol selection table (T-3) and the middle symbol selection table (T-4) shown in FIGS. 66 and 67 are for determining the middle symbol of the display area in the variable display device 9. It is a table.

  Here, as described above, in this embodiment, in order to avoid misunderstanding that the chance eye is derived and displayed when the outlier symbol is derived and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye (the chance eye in the production, The control is executed to prohibit the derivation and display of the same symbol as that of the second chance chance (sudden probability variation symbol)). As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, a plurality of medium symbol selection tables are prepared for each chance. The left and right symbols determined in steps S1003 and S1005 are compared with the chance chances 1C to 40C shown in FIG. 5, and if they are the same, the middle symbol selection table (T- The middle symbol is determined using 3). Similarly, the left and right symbols are compared with the chance symbols 1T to 30T (including the sudden similarity symbols) shown in FIG. 6, and if they are the same, the middle symbol selection table (T- 4) is used. If the left and right symbols are not the same as the chance, the middle symbol is determined using the 0C table of the middle symbol selection table (T-3).

  In the middle symbol selection table (T-3) associated with “C1” to “C40”, no determination value is assigned to the middle symbol that establishes the chance item in the production (that is, the determination to be assigned). The number of values is 0). For example, in the middle symbol selection table associated with “40C”, the middle symbol at the chance eye 40C shown in FIG. 5 (the middle symbol in the middle display area) is “1”. The number of judgment values assigned to is 0. On the other hand, in the middle symbol selection table associated with “0C”, no chance will be established no matter what symbol the middle symbol becomes, so the determination values are assigned to all symbols substantially equally. ing. In addition, in the middle symbol selection table (T-4) associated with “1T” to “30T”, no determination value is assigned to the middle symbol that establishes a chance for a chance of success.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the middle symbol selection table corresponding to the chance, and determines the symbol having the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1006 as the middle symbol. Accordingly, in the reach-less losing determination process, it is prohibited to determine the out-of-order symbol (including the sudden similarity symbol) as the decorative symbol stop symbol.

  On the other hand, when it is in the story mode in step S1001 (Y in step S1001), a left symbol determining random number is extracted (step S1009). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table (JT-1) in the story mode shown in FIG. 68 (step S1010). . In the story mode left symbol selection table (JT-1), as shown in FIG. 68, a plurality of judgment values other than “*” are assigned so that the ratio of the special symbol displayed on each left symbol is high. ing. In the case of a one-line effect in the story mode of this embodiment, a blank “*” symbol is not used. That is, only the symbols “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, and “7 (outlined)” are used. Therefore, no judgment value is assigned to “*”. In the story mode, the ratio determined for the left symbol selection table (JT-1) left symbol “7 (outlined)” (special symbol) is also 32/67, so the ratio displayed is higher than other left symbols. . Specifically, the ratio at which “1” to “7” are displayed is 5/67, respectively. Further, in the normal effect mode, the ratio of the special symbol displayed in the left display area of the variable display device 9 was 21/67. Thus, the ratio of the special symbol appearing in the story mode as described above. There are many. As a result, during the story mode, special symbols appear more frequently, and the player can have more expectation of a big hit, and the gameability can be improved.

  The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value as the left symbol. The determined left symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a right symbol determining random number (step S1011). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the right symbol of the off symbol using the story mode middle symbol selection table (JT-2) corresponding to the left symbol shown in FIG. (Step S1012).

  In the story mode, the right symbol selection table (JT-2) is similar to the right symbol selection table (T-2) in order to prevent reach from occurring. The number is “0”.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol determined in step S1010, and determines the symbol having the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1011 as the right symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1013). Next, based on the left and right symbols determined in steps S1010 and S1012, the effect control microcomputer 100 is in the story mode medium symbol selection table (JT-3) shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 or in the story mode. The middle symbol selection table (JT-4) is selected (step S1014). Then, according to the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the story mode medium symbol selection table (JT-3) or story mode medium symbol selection table (JT-4) selected in step S1014. The middle symbol of the extraordinary symbol is determined and stored (step S1015).

  Even in the story mode, in order to avoid misunderstanding that the chance eye is derived and displayed when the outlier symbol is derived and displayed, control is performed to prohibit the same symbol as the chance eye from being derived and displayed as a symbol. To do. Since the decorative symbols are displayed in one line during the story mode, the chances 5C, 10C, 15C, 20C, 25C, 30C, 35C, and 40C shown in FIG. 5 and the chances 1T to 6T shown in FIG. 6 are obtained. You should prohibit it. Therefore, the left and right symbols determined in steps S1010 and S1012 are compared with these chances. If they are the same, the middle / story symbol selection table (JT-3) corresponding to the chance is selected. A middle symbol is determined using the middle symbol selection table (JT-4) in the story mode. If the left and right symbols are not the same as the chance, the middle symbol is determined using the 0C table in the middle / middle symbol selection table (JT-3) in the story mode.

  The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1013 as the middle symbol. Accordingly, in the reach-less losing determination process, it is prohibited to determine the off-line symbol that becomes a chance as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 72 and FIG. 73 are flowcharts showing reach determination loss determination processing (step S655). In the reach determination loss determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a reach symbol determination random number (step S1021). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is in the story mode (step S1022). When in story mode (Y in step S1022), based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617), variation patterns including trolley reach (variation numbers 110, 111, It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is 122 to 125 (step S1023). If the variation pattern does not include the truck reach (N in Step S1023), the production control microcomputer 100 determines the one line of the decorative symbols in the story mode according to the random number extracted in Step S1021. The reach symbols (same left and right symbols) are determined and stored using the single reach symbol selection table (BH-2) shown in FIG.

  In the single reach design selection table (BH-2), among the reach designs shown in FIG. However, since the reach symbol (8CH) is a jackpot confirmed symbol, no determination value is assigned. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1021 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1025). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the middle symbol selection table (BH-3) shown in FIG. 75 (step S1026).

  As shown in FIG. 75, the symbol selection table (BH-3) during out-of-reach reach is assigned a plurality of determination values for the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol determined in step S1024. Here, the middle symbol selection table (BH-3) shown in FIG. 75 is different from the middle symbol selection table shown in FIG. 66, FIG. 67, FIG. 70, and FIG. The symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol about is shown. During the story mode, the decorative symbol “*” is not used, and the eight decorative symbols “1”, “2”, “3”, and “7 (outlined)” are used. Accordingly, the judgment value is assigned to the symbol differences “−13”, “−11”, “−9”, “−7”, “−5”, “−3”, “−1”, and “+1” that the decorative symbol becomes “*”. Not. In addition, the determination value is not given to “−2” and “+2” which are the smallest symbol difference among symbols displayed in the story mode. As a result, during the story mode, it is possible to make it easy to recognize that it will not become a reach-out symbol that is close to the big hit symbol, and will not be a big hit. And since it is alert | reported whether it becomes a big hit by development of a story, a story production and a display result can be matched.

  If the story mode is not set in step S1022 (N in step S1022), or if it is a trolley reach in step S1023 (Y in step S1023), the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received variation pattern. Based on the contents of the command (the fluctuation pattern saved in step S617), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with a single / double common reach (a fluctuation pattern having “S & W” written in FIGS. 18 to 20). Determination is made (step S1027). If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1027), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the random value extracted in step S1021 to display the common reach symbol selection table shown in FIG. Reach symbols (same left and right symbols) are determined and stored using (H-1) (step S1028).

  In the common reach symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to each of the reach symbols (reach patterns; 1UH to 7UH, 1LH to 7LH, 1CH to 7CH, 2WH to 7WH) shown in FIG. However, since the reach symbols (8UH, 8LH, 8CH, 1WH, 8WH) are symbols for determining the big hit, no determination value is assigned. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1021 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern including normal reach (variation patterns of variation numbers 4 to 8 in FIG. 18) based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not (step S1029). If the variation pattern does not include the normal reach (N in Step S1029), the process proceeds to S1035. If the variation pattern includes a normal reach (Y in step S1029), a medium symbol determination random number is extracted (step S1030). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the symbol selection table (H-4) during normal deviation shown in FIG. 79 (step S1031).

  As shown in FIG. 79, the symbol selection table during normal deviation (H-4) is divided for each type of normal reach (normal 10 frames, normal 13 frames, normal 14 frames, normal 17 frames, normal 19 frames). Also, the reach design determined in step S1028 is divided according to whether it is a single reach or a double reach. Here, “frame” indicates the number of symbols (number of symbols) in which the middle symbol proceeds (varies) after the occurrence of normal reach. For example, the normal 10 frames indicates that the middle symbol fluctuates 10 frames after the normal reach occurs. In each table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences for the reach symbols determined in step S1028. Here, the normal symbol selection table shown in FIG. 79 is different from the middle symbol selection tables shown in FIGS. 66, 67, 70, and 71 with respect to the reach symbol for the middle symbol on the reach line. The design difference is shown. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, in the case of double reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the symbol afterward (for example, “1” in the case of 1WH) is shown. Since the decorative symbols are 16 symbols “1”, “*”, “2”... “*”, The symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol is “−14” to “+1”. For example, the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol “3” becomes the middle symbol “2”.

  In the symbol selection table (H-4) during normal deviation, no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit symbol. In addition, in the symbol selection table during normal deviation for double reach, a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because if the medium symbol of the symbol difference “−2” is determined when the double reach occurs, it becomes a big hit symbol. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1030 as the middle symbol.

  In step S1027, when the variation pattern is not a single / double reach (N in step S1027), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the variation pattern command received (variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (a variation pattern having “S” in FIGS. 18 to 20) (step S1032). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1032), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1021 and the single reach design selection table (H-2) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store the reach symbol (step S1033). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1035.

  In the single reach symbol selection table, among the reach symbols shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of determination values are assigned to single reach reach symbols (1 UH to 7 UH, 1 LH to 7 LH, 1 CH to 7 CH). However, since the reach symbols (8UH, 8LH, 8CH) are symbols for determining the big hit, no determination value is assigned. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1021 as the reach design.

  In step S1032, if the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1032), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the reach symbol using the double reach symbol selection table (H-3) shown in FIG. 78 according to the random number value extracted in step S1021 (step S1034). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1035.

  In the double reach symbol selection table (H-3), among the reach symbols shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the double reach reach symbols (2WH to 7WH). However, since the reach symbols (1WH, 8WH) are symbols of big hit, no determination value is assigned. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1021 as the reach design.

  In step S1035, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1035). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbols using the super development middle symbol selection table (H-5) shown in FIG. 80 according to the extracted random number values (step S1036).

  During the super development, the symbol selection table (H-5) is divided according to whether the variation pattern is for single reach or for double reach, as shown in FIG. In the super development time symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences for the reach symbols determined in step S1028, S1033, or S1034. Here, the super-development middle symbol selection table shown in FIG. 80 differs from the middle symbol selection tables shown in FIGS. 66, 67, 70, and 71 with respect to the reach symbol for the middle symbol on the reach line. The design difference is shown. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, in the case of double reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the symbol afterward (for example, “1” in the case of 1WH) is shown. Note that a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit symbol. In addition, in the symbol selection table during normal deviation for double reach, a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because if the medium symbol of the symbol difference “−2” is determined when the double reach occurs, it becomes a big hit symbol. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1035 as the middle symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the received variation pattern command contents (variation pattern saved in step S617) as variation patterns (variation numbers “27” to “27”) described in “chance” shown in FIG. Based on whether or not it is “41”), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance (step S1037). When the chance chance is displayed as a temporary stop, in this embodiment, the chance eye is displayed as a temporary stop when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then the effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a chance stop temporary stop (Y in step S1037), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1038). Then, according to the extracted random number value, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the chance eye selection table (H-6) corresponding to the single reach symbol shown in FIG. 81 or the chance item corresponding to the double reach symbol shown in FIG. The chance item is determined and stored using the selection table (H-7) (step S1039). For example, when the reach symbol determined in step S1028 or S1033 is “1UH”, “1CH”, or “1LH” that is “1” and single reach, the chance (1C to 40C) as shown in FIG. ) Are determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to “1C” to “10C”, “16C” to “20C”, and “26C” to “30C”. Further, for example, when the reach symbol determined in S1028 or step S1034 is “3WH” that is double reach with “2” “3”, the chance (1C-40C) as shown in FIG. Of these, a chance is determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to “6C” to “20C” and “26C” to “30C”.

  In addition to the tables shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the chance eye selection table corresponding to the reach symbol is a table or reach symbol corresponding to the case where the reach symbol is a single reach of “3” to “7”. Is a table corresponding to the case where the double reach of “3” “4” to “6” “7” is provided.

  83 and 84 are flowcharts showing the dedicated pattern probability variation symbol determination processing. The dedicated pattern probability variation design determination process is executed when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern dedicated to probability variation (dedicated to probability variation big hit) (for example, variation pattern with variation number 48) is received in FIGS. It is processing.

  In the dedicated pattern probability changing symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number (step S1041). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is in the story mode (step S1042). When in the story mode (Y in step S1042), based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617), a variation pattern including trolley reach (variation number 124 in FIGS. 19 and 20). , 125 variation patterns) is determined (step S1043). If it is not the fluctuation pattern including the truck reach (N in Step S1043), the effect control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in Step S1041 and displays the single jackpot symbol selection table (BF-8) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a probability variation symbol (step S1044). Thereafter, the process ends.

  In the single jackpot symbol selection table (BF-8), a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF to 10CF) of the middle line among the probability variation symbols. Since it is in the story mode (Y in step S1042) and is not a fluctuation pattern including a trolley reach (N in step S1043), only the middle line of the decorative design is displayed. Accordingly, the single jackpot symbol selection table (BF-8) is set so that the probability variation symbols 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF-10CF, which are the middle probability variation symbols, are selected. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1041 as the probability variation symbol.

  In step S1042, if it is not in the story mode (N in step S1042), or if it is a trolley reach in step S1043 (Y in step S1043), in this embodiment, a relief effect (provisional with a detachment symbol) After the stop, an effect in which the big hit symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. At this time, the production control microcomputer 100 first extracts a temporary stop symbol determination random number (step S1045). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1046). ). If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1046), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 94 according to the random number values extracted in steps S1041 and S1045. A temporary stop symbol and a final stop symbol are determined and stored using the selection table (F-4) (step S1047).

  Here, the “temporary stop symbol” refers to a symbol that is temporarily stopped before the relief effect is executed. Further, the “final stop symbol” refers to a symbol that is derived and displayed after the relief effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-4) determines a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a temporary stop symbol (here, the left and right symbols). A table (temporary stop symbol table) is provided. The final stop symbol table includes a probable variation symbol (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF, 8CF (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF, 1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table includes a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, a table when “1CF” to “8CF”, The table is divided into a table for “1SF” to “8SF” and a table for “1AF” to “8AF”. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbol as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol. In this embodiment, the final stop symbols of “9UF”, “10UF”, “9LF”, “10LF”, “9CF”, “10CF”, “9SF”, “10SF”, and “9AF” are not used. It may be used as a stop symbol.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1041 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern including normal reach (variation pattern of variation numbers 48 to 50 in FIG. 19) based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not (step S1048). If the variation pattern does not include the normal reach (N in Step S1048), the process proceeds to S1054. If the variation pattern includes a normal reach (Y in step S1048), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1049). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table (F-5) shown in FIG. 95 according to the extracted random number value (step S1050).

  As shown in FIG. 95, the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table (F-5) is divided for each type of normal reach (normal 13 frames, normal 16 frames, normal 19 frames), and determined in step S1047. The temporary stop symbols are divided according to whether they are single reach or double reach. In each table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences (“−14” to “+1”) with respect to the temporary stop symbols determined in step S1047.

  In the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table (F-5), no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the temporary stop symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit symbol. In addition, in the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table for double reach, no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the temporary stop symbol. This is because if the medium symbol of the symbol difference “−2” is determined when the double reach occurs, it becomes a big hit symbol. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1049 as the middle symbol.

  For example, in step S1047, using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-4), “1UF” is determined as the final stop symbol, “2UF” is determined as the temporary stop symbol, and in step S1050, Assume that the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol is determined using the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table (F-5). In this case, the shifted pattern “212” (“***” in the middle line and “381” in the lower line) is temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper line. Then, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol “111” is derived and displayed on the upper line as the final stop symbol.

  In step S1046, if it is not a variation pattern with a single / double reach (N in step S1046), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the variation pattern command received (the variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1051). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1051), the production control microcomputer 100 performs a single jackpot symbol selection table (shown in FIG. 97) according to the random number values extracted in steps S1041 and S1045 ( The final stop symbol and the temporary stop symbol are determined and stored using F-10) (step S1052). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1054.

  As shown in FIG. 97, the single jackpot symbol selection table (F-10) is for determining a final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a temporary stop symbol (left and right symbols). A table (temporary stop symbol table) is provided. In the final stop symbol table, the probability variation symbols (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, which are single reach among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 7CF, 8CF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table is divided into a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, and a table when “1CF” to “8CF”. It has been. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbol as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol. In this embodiment, “9UF”, “10UF”, “9LF”, “10LF”, “9CF”, and “10CF” are not used as the final stop symbols, but they may be used as the final stop symbols. Good.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1041 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Note that, in the super reach variation pattern for executing the relief effect, a symbol difference between the temporary stop symbol and the left and right symbols is designated. For example, the variation pattern of variation number “66” shown in FIG. 19 is “+1 earthquake relief”, indicating that the symbol difference of the temporary stop symbol determined in step S1052 with respect to the left and right symbols is “+1”. . Thus, the middle symbol of the temporary stop symbol is automatically determined based on the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern command. For example, when the temporary stop symbol is 2UF and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command is “+1”, the symbol “232” is temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper stage. Thereafter, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol which is the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  In step S1051, when it is not a variation pattern with single reach (N in step S1051), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is with double reach (after double). In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with double reach (the fluctuation pattern in which “line” in FIG. 18 to FIG. 20 is “W”) is not a first hit but always a last hit. At this time, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the double after-hit big hit symbol selection table (F-18) shown in FIG. 100 according to the random number values extracted in step S1041 and step S1045, and temporarily stops and final stops. A symbol is determined and stored (step S1053). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1054.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the double rear hit big hit symbol selection table (F-18) determines a table for determining a final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a temporary stop symbol (left and right symbols). A table (temporary stop symbol table) is provided. In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) that become the double after hit among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1AF” to “8AF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbols as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol. In this embodiment, the probability variation symbol “9AF” is not used as the final stop symbol, but may be used as the final stop symbol. Moreover, you may make it come first.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1041 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Note that the middle symbol of the temporary stop symbol is automatically determined by the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command. After the temporary stop symbol that is the reach failure symbol is displayed temporarily, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol that is the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  In step S1054, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1054). S1054). When the chance chance is displayed as a temporary stop, in this embodiment, the chance eye is displayed as a temporary stop when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then the effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop at the chance (Y in step S1054), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance-point determining random number (step S1055). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the chance eye selection table (H-6 or H-7) corresponding to the reach symbol (big hit symbol) shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 according to the extracted random number value. Eyes are determined and stored (step S1056). For example, when the jackpot symbol determined in steps S1047, S1052, and S1053 is “1UF”, “1CF”, or “1LF”, among the chances (1C to 40C) as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. Chance points are determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to “1C” to “10C”, “16C” to “20C”, and “26C” to “30C”.

  FIG. 85 and FIG. 86 are flowcharts showing the non-probability variable symbol determination process. Note that the non-probable variation symbol determination process is performed when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern of variation number 55) for normal use (for example, variation number 55) is received in FIGS. In FIG. 20, a variation pattern command (other than a dedicated pattern) indicating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit is received, and a normal big hit designation command (8C01 (H)) or a promiscuous big hit per 2,3 designation as a symbol information designation command This is a process executed when an uncertain variable symbol is determined when a command (8C03 (H), 8C04 (H)) is received.

  In the non-probable variation design determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1061). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is in the story mode (step S1062). When in the story mode (Y in step S1062), based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617), a variation pattern including trolley reach (variation number 122 in FIGS. 19 and 20). , 123 variation pattern) is determined (step S1063). When it is not the fluctuation pattern including the truck reach (N in Step S1063), the effect control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in Step S1061 and displays the single jackpot symbol selection table (BF-7) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation symbol (step S1064). Thereafter, the process ends.

  In the single jackpot symbol selection table (BF-7), among the non-probability variation symbols, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the non-probability variation symbols (2CF, 4CF, 6CF) of the middle line. Since it is in the story mode (Y in step S1062) and is not a fluctuation pattern including a trolley reach (N in step S1063), only one line in the middle stage is displayed. Accordingly, the single jackpot symbol selection table (BF-7) is set so that 2CF, 4CF, and 6CF, which are the middle probability variation symbols, are selected as the non-probability variation symbols. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1061 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1062, when it is not in the story mode (N in step S1062), or in the case where it is a trolley reach in step S1063 (Y in step S1063), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the received variation pattern. Based on the contents of the command (the fluctuation pattern saved in step S617), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern has a single / double reach (step S1065). If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1065), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 92 according to the random number value extracted in step S1061. (F-1) is used to determine and store an uncertain variable symbol (step S1066). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1068.

  The common jackpot symbol selection table (F-1) includes non-probable symbols (2UF, 2LF, 2CF, 2SF, 4UF, 4LF, 4CF, 4SF, 6UF, 6LF, 6CF) among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. , 6SF) is assigned a plurality of determination values. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1061 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1065, if the fluctuation pattern is not a single / double common reach (N in step S1065), the production control microcomputer 100 is always double reach in this embodiment. , It is determined that this is a fluctuation pattern with double reach (after double). At this time, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a non-probable variation symbol using the double after-hit jackpot symbol selection table (F-15) shown in FIG. 98 according to the random number value extracted in step S1061 (step S1061). S1067). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1068.

  In the double hit big hit symbol selection table (F-15), a plurality of determination values are assigned to symbols (2AF, 4AF, 6AF) which are double after hit among non-probable variation symbols. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1061 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1068, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1068). S1068). When the chance chance is displayed as a temporary stop, in this embodiment, the chance eye is displayed as a temporary stop when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then the effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop at the chance (Y in step S1068), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance-point determining random number (step S1069). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the chance eye selection table (H-6 or H-7) corresponding to the reach symbol (big hit symbol) shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 according to the extracted random number value. Eyes are determined and stored (step S1070). Thereafter, the process ends.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a sudden probability variation design determination process. The sudden probability variation design determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern of variation numbers 126 to 137 shown in FIG. 20 is received.

  In the sudden probability variation design determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1081). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the variation pattern (variation numbers 128 to 133 in FIG. 20) that suddenly changes with special symbols based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is 135 to 137 (step S1082). If the variation pattern does not suddenly change with a special symbol (N in step S1082), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the sudden probability variation symbol selection table (F-25) shown in FIG. 88A according to the extracted random number value. Is used to suddenly determine and store a probable variation pattern (step S1083).

  In the sudden probability variation symbol selection table (F-25), the determination values of the sudden probability variation symbols 1T to 6T (excluding the chance items for sudden accuracy and the similar similarity symbols) shown in FIG. 6 are assigned substantially evenly. The effect control microcomputer 100 suddenly determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the extracted random number value as the probability variation symbol.

  In the case of a variation pattern that suddenly changes with special symbols (Y in step S1082), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is in the story mode (step S1084). When in the story mode (Y in step S1084), based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), the variation pattern including trolley reach (in FIG. 20, variation numbers 133 and 137). It is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern (step S1085). If it is not a fluctuation pattern including a truck reach (N in Step S1085), the effect control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in Step S1081 and uses the single sudden probability variable symbol selection table shown in FIG. 88 (C). (Special symbol) (F-27) is used to suddenly determine and store a probability variation symbol (step S1086). Thereafter, the process ends.

  In the single sudden probability variation design selection table (F-27), among the sudden probability variation symbols of the special symbol shown in FIG. Judgment values are allocated almost evenly. Since it is in the story mode (Y in step S1084) and is not a fluctuation pattern including a trolley reach (N in step S1085), only one line in the middle stage is displayed. Accordingly, the single sudden probability variation symbol selection table (F-27) is set so that 33T, 38T, 43T, 48T, and 53T, which are the middle probability variation symbols, are selected as the sudden probability variation symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 suddenly determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1081 as the probability variation symbol.

  If it is not in the story mode in step S1084 (N in step S1084), or if it is a trolley reach in step S1085 (Y in step S1085), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts in step S1081. In accordance with the random number value, the sudden probability variation symbol selection table (special symbol) (F-26) shown in FIG. 88B is used to determine and store the sudden probability variation symbol (step S1087). Thereafter, the process ends.

  In the sudden probability variation symbol selection table (F-26), a plurality of determination values are assigned substantially evenly to the sudden probability variation symbols (31T to 33T, 35T to 55T) of the special symbol shown in FIG. The production control microcomputer 100 suddenly determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1081 as the probability variation symbol.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a combined pattern decoration design determination process. In the combined pattern decoration design determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 first receives the normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)), the probability variation jackpot two designation command (8C03 (H)) or the probability variation in the received symbol information designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the big hit 3 designation command (8C04 (H)) is designated (step S671). When those contents are designated (Y in step S671), the production control microcomputer 100 indicates that the non-probable variation big hit has been determined (the big hit symbol at the time of stoppage of variation is the non-probable variable symbol). An uncertain variable big hit determination flag is set (step S672). Then, the uncertain variable symbol determination process shown in FIGS. 85 and 86 is executed (step S673).

  When the symbol information designation command is not the normal jackpot designation command or the probability variation big hit 2, 3 designation command (N in step S671), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the probability variation big hit has been determined (the big hit symbol at the time when the fluctuation is stopped is A probability variation jackpot determination flag indicating that the symbol is a probability variation symbol is set (step S674). Then, the combined pattern probability changing symbol determination process is executed (step S675).

  90 and 91 are flowcharts showing the combined pattern probability variation symbol determination process. The combined pattern probability variation design determination process receives a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern for normal / probability variation (for example, variation pattern of variation number 42) in FIGS. 18 to 20, and also performs probability variation as a symbol information designation command. This is a process executed when a jackpot 1 designation command is received.

  In the combined pattern probability variation symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1131). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is in the story mode (step S1132). When in the story mode (Y in step S1132), based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617), a variation pattern including trolley reach (variation number 122 in FIGS. 19 and 20). , 123 variation pattern) is determined (step S1133). When it is not the fluctuation pattern including the truck reach (N in Step S1133), the effect control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in Step S1131, and displays the single jackpot symbol selection table (BF-8) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a probability variation symbol (step S1134). Thereafter, the process ends.

  If the story mode is not set in step S1132 (N in step S1132), or if it is a trolley reach in step S1133 (Y in step S1133), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the received variation pattern. Based on the contents of the command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (step S1135). If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1135), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 93 according to the random number extracted in step S1131. The probability variation symbol is determined and stored using (F-2) (step S1136). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1140.

  In step S1135, if it is not a variation pattern with a single / double reach (N in step S1135), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the contents of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1137). When the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1137), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1131, and displays the single jackpot symbol selection table (F-8) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a probability variation symbol (step S1138). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1140.

  The jackpot symbol selection table for single (F-8) is a probable variation (1UF, 1LF, 1CF, 3UF, 3LF, 3CF, 5UF, 5LF, 5CF, 7UF, 7LF, 7CF among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. , 8UF, 8LF, 8CF, 9UF, 9LF, 9CF, 10UF, 10LF, 10CF). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131 as the probability variation symbol.

  In step S1137, when it is not a variation pattern with single reach (N in step S1137), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is with double reach (after double). At this time, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the probable variation symbol using the double after-hit jackpot symbol selection table (F-16) shown in FIG. 99 according to the random value extracted in step S1131 (step S1139). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1140.

  In the double rear hit big hit symbol selection table (F-16), a plurality of judgment values are assigned to probability variation symbols (1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF, 9AF) among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131 as the probability variation symbol.

  In step S1140, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1140). S1140). When the chance chance is displayed as a temporary stop, in this embodiment, the chance eye is displayed as a temporary stop when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then the effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  When the variation pattern is accompanied by a chance stop temporary stop (Y in step S1140), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1141). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the chance eye selection table (H-6 or H-7) corresponding to the reach symbol (big hit symbol) shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 according to the extracted random number value. Eyes are determined and stored (step S1142). Then, the process ends.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the temporary determination symbol determination process (step S635). In the temporary determination symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S681). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is in the story mode (step S682). When in the story mode (Y in step S682), based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), the variation pattern including trolley reach (the variation number 122 in FIGS. 19 and 20). , 123 variation pattern) is determined (step S683). When it is not the fluctuation pattern including the truck reach (N in Step S683), the effect control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in Step S681 to the single jackpot symbol selection table (BF-7) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation symbol (step S684).

  If it is not in the story mode in step S682 (N in step S682), or if it is a trolley reach in step S683 (Y in step S683), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts in step S681. According to the random number value, a non-probable variable symbol is provisionally determined and stored using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-1) shown in FIG. 92 (step S685).

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a command non-reception flag indicating that the symbol information designation command has not been received (step S686).

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the probability variation design determination process (step S640). In the missed probability variation symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S691). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a probable variation symbol using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 93 according to the random number value (step S692). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) specifying a fluctuation pattern has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern reception flag indicating that a variation pattern command has been received is set. The variation pattern reception flag is set in step S618 in the command analysis process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. In addition, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time timer, the process table to be used is selected, and the process timer setting value set at the beginning of the process table is set in the process timer.

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time.

  Decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and to derive and display the stop symbol (definite symbol) in response to the time-out of the variation time timer.

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, the big hit display is controlled. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Also, when a fanfare command designating sudden start of a probable big hit is received, a two-round effect is executed.

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a command for opening a special prize opening indicating that the special prize opening is open is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed. A re-lottery effect may be executed during a predetermined round. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the round in which the re-drawing effect is executed is determined in advance (for example, 7 rounds or 15 rounds).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the special prize opening is after being opened (closed) is received, an interval display or the like is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Note that a re-lottery effect may be executed during the ending effect.

  FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation pattern is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the decorative symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  Similarly to the control based on the display control execution data, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and the sound number Data is output to the audio output board 70.

  The process table shown in FIG. 106 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  Different process tables are used depending on whether or not the story mode is active, even if the variation pattern includes special effects (trolley reach) executed in the story mode and normal mode (modes other than the story mode). The That is, when the truck reach is reached during the story mode, a process table including process data of a connection effect (see FIG. 121) described later is used.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of process tables are prepared for one variation pattern command. Even when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the same variation pattern command, a different process table may be selected depending on the type of the process table used in the previous production. For example, in the story mode, even if the same variation pattern command is received, the process table used in the previous presentation is connected to the story in the process table used in the current presentation. A table is selected. In the case of performing a story effect where the character walks, the process table is selected so that an effect in which a treasure box appears in the direction of travel of the character is performed. In addition, when a process table that does not connect stories is used, control is performed so that a process table including a connection effect is used. For example, when a character performs a story production in which the character walks in the sea from a story production in which the character walks in the mountains, control is performed to connect the stories by the joint production.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S811). If it has been set, the flag is reset (step S812). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern of the decorative design based on the contents (variation number, variation time) designated by the variation pattern command (step S813). Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S814).

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the production control microcomputer 100 first determines whether or not the story mode is in effect (step S851). When not in the story mode (N in step S851), the process proceeds to step S862 described later. In the case of the story mode (Y in step S851), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a random number for determining the moving direction symbol (step S852). Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the previously stored traveling direction (see step S860) is right (step S853). If the previous traveling direction is right (Y in step S853), the production control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern command for big hits based on the contents (variation number and the like) specified by the variation pattern command. It is determined whether or not (step S854). If the change pattern command is for big hit (Y in step S854), the traveling direction table A shown in FIG. 109A is selected as the traveling direction table (step S855). If it is not a big hit variation pattern command in Step S854 (N in Step S854), the traveling direction table B shown in FIG. 109B is selected as the traveling direction table (Step S856).

  On the other hand, even if the previous traveling direction is the left in Step S853 (N in Step S853), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the content specified by the variation pattern command (such as the variation number). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern command is a big hit (step S857). If the change pattern command is for big hit (Y in step S857), the traveling direction table C shown in FIG. 109C is selected as the traveling direction table (step S858). If it is not a big hit variation pattern command in step S857 (N in step S857), the traveling direction table D shown in FIG. 109D is selected as the traveling direction table (step S859).

  In this way, when the table is selected and the game is out of place, the effect that the character advances in the same direction as the previous time is performed at a high rate, thereby maintaining the continuity of the effect. In the case of a big hit, a different direction from the previous time is selected at a higher rate than in the case of a loss, so that a big hit can be notified by changing the direction.

  In step S860, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the traveling direction using the traveling direction table selected in step S855, S856, S858, or S859 according to the random value extracted in step S852 (step S860). . Then, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern to be used and the traveling direction is selected (step S861), and the process proceeds to step S863. At this time, in the case of a variation pattern including trolley reach, a process table including process data of a connection effect (see FIG. 121) described later is selected.

  In step S862, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design to be used (step S862). Then, the process timer setting value in the selected process data 1 is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S863).

  Then, on the condition that the abnormality notification flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification is being performed is not set (N in Step S864), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the process of the process control microcomputer 100. Control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed according to the contents of data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step S865). For example, a control signal is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In addition, when displaying the temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol at a predetermined timing during the change, control is performed to temporarily display the temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol stored in the command analysis process.

  When the abnormality notification flag is set (Y in step S864), the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device according to the contents of only the display control execution data 1 in the process data 1 (step S864). S866). That is, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of the decorative design is started, the lamp display effect and the sound effect according to the variable display are not executed. The lamp display and sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification are continued. Note that the lamp display pattern and sound effect sound effect according to the variable display and the lamp display pattern and alarm sound (notification sound) according to the abnormal winning notification are set in different channels, and the lamp display is simultaneously displayed. If it is possible to output sounds simultaneously, it is not necessary to separate the processing of step S865 and step S866.

  In addition, when performing the process of step S866, the production control microcomputer 100 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but in accordance with the number of receptions of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command. A command for “superimposed display” is also output to the VDP 109. In other words, the variable display device 9 is controlled so that the display at that time (notification of abnormal winning is made) and the display effect image of the decorative symbol variable display are simultaneously displayed on the variable display device 9. . That is, when the abnormality notification flag is set and the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 3) or more, the variable is displayed when a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Not only the display effect according to the display is executed, but also the notification according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a variation time timer (a timer according to the variation time of the decorative design) (step S867), and indicates the value of the production control process flag during the decorative design variation processing (step S802). The value is updated (step S868).

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation processing, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation time timer has timed out (step S831). If the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S840).

  If the variation time timer has not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the process timer by 1 (step S832) and decrements the variation time timer by 1 (step S833). On the condition that the abnormality informing flag is not set (N in step S834), the effect device (variable display) is set based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next. The control state for the apparatus 9, various lamps, and the speaker 27) is changed (step S835). In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the content of the process data (process data including the re-draw effect) for executing the re-draw effect. By executing the control, the re-drawing effect during the change is executed. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the production of the changing story by executing the control of the production device according to the contents of the process data (process data including the story production) for executing the story production. Then, by executing the control of the production device according to the content of the process data (process data including the special production) for executing the special production (the production of the truck reach), By executing the control of the effect device according to the content of the process data (process data including the connection effect) for executing the connection effect, the connection effect during the change is executed.

  When the abnormality notification flag is set (Y in step S834), the rendering device is controlled according to the content of only the display control execution data i in the process data i (i is any one of 2 to n). (Step S836). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the lamp display and sound effects according to the variable display of the decorative design are not executed, but the lamp display and sound according to the abnormal prize notification are not executed. Output continues.

  In addition, when the process of step S836 is performed, the effect control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but “superimpose” according to the number of reception of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command. A command for “display” is also output to the VDP 109. Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set and the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 3) or more, only the display effect corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. Instead, the notification according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S837), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S838). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S839).

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) instructing the decorative symbol variation stop is received (step S841). If the decorative symbol stop designation command has been received, control is performed to stop and display the decorative symbol stop symbol stored in the command analysis process (step S842).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to stop and display the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the decorative symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. The present invention is not limited, and control for stopping and displaying decorative symbols may be performed based on the time-out of the variable time timer. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 does not need to send the decoration symbol stop command, and the processing load on the game control microcomputer 560 is reduced.

  If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in step S842 is a big hit symbol (non-probable variation, probability variation, or sudden probability variation) (Y in step S843), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the fanfare reception flag. It is confirmed whether it has been set (step S844). When the fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S844), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the contents of the stored fanfare command and the contents of the stored variation pattern (whether or not the sudden probability change entry effect has been executed). Based on this, either the fanfare effect or the effect for two rounds (the effect for two rounds corresponding to the sudden probability change entry effect) is selected (step S845). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a process table corresponding to the selected fanfare effect or two-round effect (step S846). Then, the process timer is started (step S847), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S848).

  If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in step S842 is not a jackpot symbol (non-probable variation symbol, probability variation symbol, or sudden probability variation symbol), that is, if it is a disjoint symbol (N in step S843), the production control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (step S849). For example, when a flag corresponding to the decorative symbol stop designation command is set, such a flag is reset. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S850).

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command has been received is set (step S901). The special winning opening open flag is set in the command analysis process. When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S903). For example, in the case of 15 rounds of big hit, the variable display device 9 displays a big hit display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters or characters indicating that a big hit has occurred. Further, for example, in the effect for two rounds, an effect for displaying special characters or characters is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 produces an in-round production (the number of rounds is based on the contents of the 15 round round big prize opening opening command). An effect for executing the corresponding round display is selected (step S907). When a command for opening a special prize opening for 2 rounds is received, there is no need to newly select an effect since an effect for 2 rounds is continuously executed during the round, but 2 for each round. When switching the effect included in the performance for round (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for two rounds may be newly selected for each round. . Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S908), and a process table corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S909). Then, the process timer is started (step S910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S911).

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, first, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not a flag after opening the special prize opening indicating that a command after opening the special prize opening has been received is set (step S921). The flag after the special winning opening is set in the command analysis process. When the flag for opening the big prize opening is not set (N in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S922), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S923). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like. Moreover, in the effect for two rounds, the effect which displays a special character, a character, etc. is performed. When the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game (when the big lottery re-draw lottery execution flag is set), a predetermined round (for example, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) A re-lottery effect is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S924), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S925). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S926).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S921 (Y in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 performs interval production (according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the command after opening the big prize opening. An effect for performing interval display is selected (step S927). When a command is received after opening the grand prize opening for 2 rounds, there is no need to select a new production since there is no need to select a new production since 2 rounds of production have been executed. When switching the effect included in the effect for the second time (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for the second round may be newly selected after the round. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after opening the special winning opening (step S928), and selects a process table corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S929). Then, the process timer is started (step S930), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S931).

  114 and 115 are flowcharts showing the round post-processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (step S940). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S940), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command is received is set. Confirmation is made (step S941). When the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S942), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S943).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S944), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S945). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S946).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether it is necessary to execute the re-lottery production during the big hit (during the round) ( Step S947). Specifically, when the symbol designating command or fanfare command indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed is received, the big lottery re-lottery execution flag is set (it is predetermined that the re-lottery effect is executed). When it is a round), it is determined that it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit.

  When it is determined that it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit (Y in step S947), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the effect during the round in which the re-lottery effect is executed (step S948). Then, a re-lottery execution completion flag is set (step S949). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit (N in Step S947), the mid-round effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (Step S950).

  Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S951), and a process table corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S952). Then, the process timer is started (step S953), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S954).

  When the ending reception flag is set in step S940 (Y in step S940), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (step S955). Specifically, it indicates that the re-lottery effect was executed during the big hit (during the round) even when the ending re-lottery execution flag is set or the big lot re-lottery execution flag is set. When the re-lottery execution completion flag is not set (see step S949), it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect.

  When it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (Y in step S955), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the ending effect for executing the re-lottery effect (step S956). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending effect (N in step S955), an ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (step S957).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the ending reception flag (step S958), and selects a process table corresponding to the ending effect (step S959). Then, the process timer is started (step S960), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process (step S807) (step S961).

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S971), and controls the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. Execute (Step S972). For example, when the end of the big hit is displayed, or when a re-lottery effect is included in the ending effect, the re-lottery effect is executed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S973), and if the process timer has timed out, predetermined flags (probability big hit decision flag, normal big hit decision flag, Suddenly probable big hit decision flag, big hit re-lottery execution flag, ending re-lottery execution flag, etc.) are reset (step S974), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). Setting is made (step S975).

  FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a notification screen displayed on the variable display device 9. FIG. 117 (A) shows an example of an initial screen displayed on the variable display device 9 by the production control microcomputer 100 in response to reception of the initialization designation command. FIG. 117B shows an example of a power failure recovery screen displayed on the variable display device 9 by the production control microcomputer 100 in response to reception of a power failure recovery designation command. FIG. 117 (C) shows an example of an abnormality notification screen displayed on the variable display device 9 by the production control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the number of receptions of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command, and the variation of the decorative pattern is shown. It is shown that the display of the abnormality notification screen is continued even if is started (see the right side of FIG. 117 (C)).

  Next, the effect aspect of the lottery symbol re-drawing effect executed in the variable display device 9 will be described. FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the jackpot symbol re-lottering effect executed in the variable display device 9. The display effect as illustrated in FIG. 118 is executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560. The display example in FIG. 118 shows a case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending effect.

  In this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives a variation pattern command other than the variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot (N in step S619), based on the received variation pattern command, The dismissal, jackpot, and jackpot type are determined, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the determination is determined (step S620). On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit is received (Y in step S619), it is determined whether it is a probable big hit or normal big hit based on the symbol information designation command received thereafter, and a decoration corresponding to it A stop symbol of the symbol is determined (step S621).

  However, the effect control microcomputer 100 may miss the symbol information designation command even though it has received the variation pattern command for both the normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 cannot determine whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, and cannot determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Therefore, if a symbol information designation command is missed despite receiving a normal big hit / probability big hit variation pattern command (Y in step S632, N in S633, N in S634), a temporary stop display is made. The stop symbol (temporarily determined symbol) of the decorative symbol is provisionally determined (step S635). The provisionally determined symbol is a non-probable variable symbol when a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variable jackpot is received.

  In this way, when the variation pattern command for normal big hit / probable big hit is received, the non-probable symbol is determined after the non-probable symbol is derived and displayed at the end of the variation of the decorative symbol. If it is determined that is a probable big hit, then it is sufficient to promote the non-probable variable symbol to a probabilistic symbol in the subsequent redraw lottery effect. If it is determined that it is, the probability variation symbol must be demoted to a non-probability variation symbol, and such an effect may discourage the player and reduce the interest of the game.

  In the example of FIG. 118, if the symbol information designation command is missed even though the variation pattern command for normal big hit / probable variation big hit is received, the non-probable variation symbol “444” is temporarily determined as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. At the end of the decorative symbol variation, the non-probable variation symbol “444” is derived and displayed (temporary stop display). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect should be executed based on the content of the fanfare command (steps S638 and S639), and when it is determined that the re-lottery effect should be executed. The probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect is determined (step S640), and the timing for executing the re-lottery effect is determined (steps S641 to S645). In the example of FIG. 118, it is assumed that the re-lottery effect is determined to be executed during the ending effect.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the big hit game based on the reception of the fanfare command, and performs the production of each round (production during the round) based on the reception of the command for opening the big prize opening. Execution is performed in order, and effects between the rounds (interval effects) are sequentially performed based on the reception of the command after the special winning opening is opened. And the ending effect which alert | reports completion | finish of jackpot based on reception of an ending command is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 118, the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect. Specifically, re-variation is started in a state where the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol, and then an effect that the probability variation symbol (“777” in the example of FIG. 118) is derived and displayed is executed. ing. Then, the player is informed that the state has entered (changed) into the probability variation state.

  FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of the story effect executed in the variable display device 9. FIG. 119 (A) shows that it is in the story mode in which the story effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), during the story mode, the variable display device 9 performs a story effect by a character or the like and displays a one-line decorative design. When the variation pattern command of “normal variation at short time” indicated by variation number 3 in FIG. 18 is received during this story mode, the production control microcomputer 100 is a regular variation as shown in FIG. 119 (B). A story is produced just by walking the character, and one line of decorative designs is displayed in a variable manner. The production control microcomputer 100 uses a left symbol selection table (JT-1), a right symbol selection table (JT-2), and a middle symbol selection table (JT-3 or JT-4). The non-reach symbol is determined (steps S1001, S1009 to S1015), and the determined non-reach symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 119C.

  Subsequently, when the story mode is continued, when the variation pattern command “dedicated to the treasure chest” shown in the variation number 113 in FIG. As shown in 119 (D), a story effect for making a treasure box appear is performed, and one line of decorative symbols is variably displayed. In the story mode, when a variation pattern command other than “normal variation at short time” is received, a story corresponding to the variation pattern command is developed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a probable variation using the single jackpot symbol selection table (BF-8) (steps S1041 to S1044). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), the production control microcomputer 100 informs that the game is a big hit by, for example, a story production in which a treasure is contained in a treasure box, and derives and displays the determined probability variation symbol.

  On the other hand, during the story mode, when the variation pattern command “treasure chest out” shown in the variation number 102 in FIG. 20 is received, the production control microcomputer 100 appears as shown in FIG. 119 (D). In addition to performing a story effect, one line of decorative symbols is variably displayed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the reach / removal symbol using the single reach / reach symbol selection table (BH-2) and the off-reach reach symbol selection table (BH-3) (steps). S1021 to step S1026). After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the production control microcomputer 100 notifies the fact that the treasure box is off by a story production with a snake in the treasure box, and also has a reach off symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. “737” is derived and displayed.

  Thus, during the story mode, the story can be developed over a plurality of variations.

  FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of a normal mode (a mode other than the story mode) executed in the variable display device 9. FIG. 120A shows a state before fluctuation in the normal mode. At this time, when the variation pattern command of “Minecart destination” indicated by the variation number 72 in FIG. 19 is received, the production control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), displays the decorative design of the variable display device 9. Start displaying fluctuations. Then, in response to receiving the probability change jackpot 1 designation command (8C02 (H)) (N in step S671), the combined pattern probability variation symbol determination process (step S675) is executed, and the common jackpot symbol selection table ( F-2) is used to determine the probability variation symbol (step S1136).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the reach of the probability variation symbol, and further, as shown in FIGS. 120 (D) to (F), the special effect of the truck reach is displayed. Do. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the determined probability variation symbol as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example when a special effect of trolley reach common with the normal mode is performed during the story mode executed in the variable display device 9. FIG. 121 (A) shows that the story mode in which the story effect is performed is being performed. In the story mode, upon receiving the “Trokko first hit” variation pattern command indicated by the variation number 122 in FIG. 20, the effect control microcomputer 100 responds to the variation pattern command as shown in FIG. 121 (B). In addition to producing a storyline, the display of one line of decorative symbols is displayed in a variable manner.

  In this embodiment, when a special effect is executed during the story mode, a connection effect for connecting the story effect and the special effect without a sense of incongruity is executed. For this purpose, when receiving the variation pattern command including the special effect of the truck reach during the story mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the process table including the process data of the connection effect (step S861). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a connection effect in which a character finds a truck and moves on the truck as shown in FIGS. 121 (C) and (D), for example.

  Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 120, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a special production of trolley reach as shown in FIGS. 121 (E) to (G), as shown in FIG. 120 (H). Then, the probability variation symbol determined in step S1134 is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 122 is an explanatory view showing a display example of special symbols in the variable display device 9. As shown in FIG. 122 (A), after the variable display of the variable display device 9 starts to be displayed and the special symbol is derived and displayed in the left area of the variable display device 9 as shown in FIG. 122 (B), As shown in FIG. 122C, it is not the case that decorative symbols other than special symbols are derived and displayed in the right area. Also, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), a special symbol is derived and displayed in the right area, and when the special symbol reaches, the big hit is fixed. Further, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), when a decorative pattern (“1”, “2”, “4”, “5”, “6”) other than a predetermined symbol is derived and displayed in the middle region, a sudden probability change big hit is obtained. As shown in FIG. 122 (F), when a predetermined symbol (“3”, “7”, “7 (outlined)”) is derived and displayed in the middle region, a probable big hit is obtained. As described above, when reaching a special symbol, it is determined that a big hit (suddenly probable big hit or probable big hit) is established, so that the gameability can be improved.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the notification control process in step S707. In the notification control process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1011). The initial notification flag is set when an initialization designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (see step S650 in FIG. 61). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1016. If the initial notification flag is set, the value of the period timer set in step S664 is decremented by 1 (step S1012). When the value of the period timer becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed (Y in step S1013), the initial notification flag is reset (step S1014).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the variable display device 9 to the VDP 109 (step S1015). The VDP 109 erases the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the variable display device 9 in response to the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1016, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command has been received is set (step S1016). If not set (N in step S1016), the process proceeds to step S1018. If the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag is set (Y in step S1016), the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag is reset (step S1017), and the process proceeds to step S1022. That is, the fact that the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command has been received is a case where an abnormal winning to the big winning opening is detected. In this case, an abnormal winning notification based only on sound output is performed by executing step S1022 described later. Is executed.

  In step S1018, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command has been received is set (step S1018). If it is not set (N in step S1018), the process is terminated as it is. If the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag is set (Y in step S1018), the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag is reset (step S1019), and the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is incremented by one. (Step S1020). The abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is a counter for counting the number of times of receiving the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is 1 (that is, whether or not the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received only once) (step S1021). ). If the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is 1 (Y in step S1021), the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the audio output board 70 ( Step S1022). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) corresponding to notification of abnormal winning is performed thereafter. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1029).

  If the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is not 1 (N in step S1021), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is 2 (that is, abnormal winning notification 1). It is confirmed whether or not the designated command has been received twice (step S1023). If the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is 2 (Y in step S1023), the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the audio output board 70 ( Step S1024). In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs lamp control execution data indicating lamp display corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the lamp driver board 35 (step S1025). Therefore, thereafter, lamp display and sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the notification of abnormal winning is performed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1029).

  If the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is not 2 (that is, if the value of the abnormal winning notification 1 reception counter is 3 or more (if the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received three or more times)) (step) In step S1023, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1026). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs lamp control execution data indicating lamp display in response to the abnormal winning notification to the lamp driver board 35 (step S1027). Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a command to the VDP 109 to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time in the variable display device 9 (step S1028). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays the abnormality notification screen on the variable display device 9 according to the command (see FIG. 117C). Therefore, after that, lamp display and sound output (output of the abnormal notification sound) according to the notification of the abnormal winning is performed, and the abnormality notification screen is superimposed on the variable display device 9. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1029).

  By executing the above processing, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the abnormal winning notification based on the reception of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command or the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command. The production control microcomputer 100 starts the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command after receiving the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command, and then receives the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command. The notification mode of the abnormal winning notification is switched in accordance with the number of times of receiving. That is, in this embodiment, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received only once, the abnormal winning notification is executed using only the sound output. When the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received twice, the abnormal winning notification is executed using the lamp display in addition to the sound output. Further, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received three times or more, in addition to the lamp display and sound output, the abnormal winning notification is executed by superimposing the abnormal notification screen.

  It should be noted that the notification mode of the abnormal prize notification shown in this embodiment is merely an example, for example, by changing the abnormality notification sound to be output or changing the display pattern (for example, lighting or blinking) of the lamp. The notification mode of the winning notification may be switched. In this embodiment, the case where the notification mode of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is switched according to the number of times of reception of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command has been described. However, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received once, sound output is performed. In addition, the abnormal winning notification may be performed using all of the abnormality notification screen display and lamp display. In this case, when receiving the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command once, the production control microcomputer 100 performs output control of the abnormal notification sound using the speaker 27 and causes the variable display device 9 to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen. The display control of the abnormal display using the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c is performed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the abnormal winning notification is executed using only the sound output when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received only once is shown. It is not restricted to what was shown in embodiment. For example, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received only once, the abnormal notification screen may be superimposed on the variable display device 9, and display control of abnormal display using the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c is possible. May be performed. Further, the abnormality notification effect may be performed using any two or all of the abnormality notification screen superimposed display, sound output, or abnormality display using the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c.

  FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the situation of the display effect on the variable display device 9 and the sound effect by the speaker 27. FIG. 124 (A) shows an example when the decorative display is variably displayed on the variable display device 9. FIG. 124 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the variable display device 9.

  FIG. 124 (C) shows an example in which abnormality notification is performed in the variable display device 9 and an abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27. FIG. 124 (C) shows the status of the abnormal winning notification when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received three times or more. The production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display an abnormality notification screen on the variable display device 9 when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received three or more times from the game control microcomputer 560, and the lamp 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c are used to perform control for displaying an abnormality notification (for example, blinking display), and control for outputting an abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. Further, even if the decorative pattern variable display is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the abnormality notification screen display on the variable display device 9, the abnormality notification display using the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c, and the speaker 27 are performed. The output of the abnormal alarm sound from is continued. Even after the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the abnormality notification screen display on the variable display device 9, the abnormality notification display using the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c, and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are performed. Let it continue. Note that the production control microcomputer 100 does not execute the control for erasing the abnormality notification screen and the control for stopping the output of the abnormality notification sound, so the display of the abnormality notification screen on the variable display device 9 and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c. The abnormality notification display using and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. However, when the predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the abnormality notification screen, the abnormality notification display using the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c, and the output of the abnormality notification sound are started, the production control microcomputer 100 notifies the abnormality notification. Control may be performed to stop the display of the screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound.

  FIG. 124 (C) shows the status of the abnormal winning notification when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received three times or more. However, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received only once, Only control for outputting the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 is performed. Further, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received twice, the abnormality notification using the lamps 25, 28 a, 28 b, 28 c is controlled and the abnormality notification sound is output from the speaker 27. .

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not detect an abnormal prize and does not detect an abnormal prize for a predetermined period after the power supply to the game machine is started (a period during which the initialization notification is executed). No abnormal winning notification 1 designation command or abnormal winning notification 2 designation command is transmitted from the microcomputer 560. However, the game control microcomputer 560 has a special symbol process flag value other than a predetermined value (4 in this embodiment) or a value other than the normal symbol process flag value (3 in this embodiment). When the value of the cumulative prize counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 in this embodiment), the abnormal control is always detected, and the production control microcomputer 100 starts supplying power to the gaming machine. If an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command or an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command is received within a predetermined period of time, the abnormal winning notification may not be performed.

  FIG. 125 is a timing chart showing a detection timing for detecting an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 and a notification timing for executing an abnormal winning notification. In FIG. 125, as an example, a case where the second start winning opening 14 is opened and closed based on the opening pattern in the low base state is shown. The same applies to the case where the second start winning opening 14 is opened and closed based on the opening pattern in the high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the game control microcomputer 560 operates when the second start winning opening 14 is in an open state (a state in which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is physically open and a predetermined interval period (in this example, 1 second), the game is processed as a normal winning when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected (the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on). When the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state (see step S261), when a game ball winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (the second start opening switch 14a is turned on) is detected. (Refer to Step S264), it is determined that there is an abnormal winning, and the value of the winning cumulative number counter is counted up (see Step S264A). Then, when the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state, the number of times that the game ball wins to the second start winning opening 14 (the second start opening switch 14a is turned on) is accumulated to be a predetermined number (this When it reaches 5 times in the example (refer to step S264B), it is determined that an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, and an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S265). (See S266).

  The production control microcomputer 100 starts the abnormal winning notification based on the reception of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command. In this case, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received for the first time (see step S1021), the abnormal winning notification is executed by controlling the speaker 27 to output an abnormal notification sound (see step S1022).

  In addition, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects an abnormal winning and transmits an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command, the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects the winning of the game ball again when the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state. As long as the value of the cumulative prize counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 in this example) (see step S264B), an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is repeatedly transmitted (see steps S265 and S266).

  The production control microcomputer 100 changes the notification mode of the abnormal winning notification according to the number of times of receiving the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command. In this case, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received for the second time (see step S1023), in addition to controlling the speaker 27 to output an abnormal notification sound, the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c are turned on. By controlling to perform the used abnormality notification display (for example, blinking), the notification mode of the abnormal winning notification is changed (see steps S1024 and S1025). Further, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is received three times or more (see step S1023), control is performed so that an abnormal notification sound is output from the speaker 27, and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c are used. In addition to controlling to display an abnormality notification (for example, blinking), the control mode for superimposing and displaying the abnormal winning notification screen on the variable display device 9 is performed to change the notification mode of the abnormal winning notification (steps S1026 to S1026). (See S1028).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, since a special symbol that is determined to be a big hit (suddenly probable big hit or probable big hit) at the time of reaching reach is prepared, it is intended to improve gameability Can do.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, even in the case of a reach-less loss, since the ratio of appearance of the special symbol is increased, it is possible to make the player have the expectation of a big hit, and the game performance Can be improved.

  Also, during the story mode (special gaming state), special symbols appear more frequently than in the normal performance mode, so that the player can have a greater expectation that will be a big hit. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the open / close state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and when it is determined that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in a state other than the open state, Based on the input of the winning detection signal to the second start winning opening 14, the accumulated number of winning game balls won in the second starting winning opening 14 is stored in the winning accumulated number counter. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on a predetermined abnormal winning number reference value (5 in this example) for determining whether or not the number is an abnormal winning number and the winning cumulative number stored in the winning cumulative number counter. Then, it is determined whether or not it is an abnormal winning state. When it is determined that the game control microcomputer 560 is in an abnormal winning state, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command for instructing execution of the abnormal notification. The effect control microcomputer 100 executes the abnormality notification by the effect device based on the abnormal prize notification 1 designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. Further, in this case, the production control microcomputer 100 can execute abnormality notification even when the variable display device 9 performs variable display of decorative symbols. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that a prize abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act on the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and as a result, an illegal act on the variable winning ball apparatus 15 can be reliably prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the abnormal winning state is based on the cumulative number of winnings, for example, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the player wins only once by chance. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is determined that the winning state is abnormal when a winning is detected due to the influence of noise. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a winning abnormality is notified due to a malfunction.

  Further, according to this embodiment, even if it is determined that the game control microcomputer 560 is in an abnormal winning state, if the value of the winning cumulative number counter is 5 or more, the winning cumulative number counter Each time the cumulative number of winnings stored in is updated, an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is transmitted. Therefore, it is possible to notify the abnormality every time there is an abnormal winning.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that the game control microcomputer 560 is in the abnormal winning state, the control is performed so as to prohibit the execution of the control for paying out the game ball. Therefore, the payout for the illegal winning prize can be prohibited, and the illegal act on the variable winning ball apparatus 15 can be prevented. Further, when there is a possibility that the second start winning opening 14 has been won due to an illegal act, it is possible to prevent the game store from being disadvantaged by not paying out the winning ball based on the winning.

  Also, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the open / close state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on the value of the normal symbol process flag. Therefore, the open / closed state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 can be accurately determined, and an illegal act on the variable winning ball apparatus 15 can be accurately detected.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 clears the cumulative number of winnings stored in the winning cumulative number counter when the game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state. Therefore, it is possible not to accumulate the number of winnings over a longer period than necessary, and to reliably detect an abnormality in winning due to an illegal act on the variable winning ball device 15.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the gaming control microcomputer 560 clears the cumulative winning number stored in the winning cumulative number counter. Therefore, it is possible not to accumulate the number of winnings over a longer period than necessary, and to reliably detect an abnormality in winning due to an illegal act on the variable winning ball device 15. In addition, the cumulative number of winnings can be cleared by turning off the power of the gaming machine, and the abnormality notification can be easily reset.

  Further, according to this embodiment, control is performed so as to prohibit the start of abnormality notification while performing initialization notification. Therefore, the initialization notification is executed prior to the prize abnormality notification, and it is ensured outside the gaming machine that the initial value is set to a numerical value that determines information that can specify the display result of the variable symbol special display. Can be recognized.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the initialization notification is prioritized over the abnormality notification, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization notification becomes difficult to recognize. That is, the initialization notification is performed prominently. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an initialization designation command when a user reset that causes the program to start executing from the top address (for example, address 0000) occurs even when power supply to the game machine is started. As a cause of the occurrence of the user reset, for example, in the case where the watchdog timer is configured to be used, there is a case where the watchdog timer has timed out due to an illegal act that prevents the smooth progress of the program. Such fraudulent acts are configured to be controlled in a probabilistic state, particularly when a predetermined jackpot symbol (predetermined probability variation jackpot symbol or sudden probability variation jackpot symbol) is determined based on a random number for determining the jackpot symbol. It is likely to occur when it is. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is initialized, and a counter for generating a jackpot symbol determining random number is initialized, and it is easy to receive an illegal act that makes it easy to grasp the count value of the counter. By making the initialization notice conspicuous as in this embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp from the outside of the gaming machine that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has been initialized. Is easily recognized.

  In addition, in this embodiment, a common special effect (for example, trolley reach) is included in the normal pattern determination process (when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the normal mode) and the short time pattern determination process (when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the story mode). The variation pattern can be determined. As a result, it is possible to make the production in the story mode surprising.

  Further, in the decorative symbol variation start process, during the story mode, the process table is selected based on the previous effect (for example, the traveling direction), so that the process table related to the previous effect can be selected.

  In addition, when a special effect is executed during the story mode, a connection effect that connects the story effect and the special effect is executed, so that a natural effect without a sense of incongruity can be executed.

  Further, when determining the middle symbol in the no-reach determination process, the middle symbol selection table that does not become a chance according to the left and right symbols is selected, and the middle symbol is determined using the selected middle symbol selection table. Thus, when it is determined that the combination of the left, middle, and right symbols does not become an opportunity, it is possible to reliably prevent the chance eye from being derived and displayed as a missed symbol.

  In addition, when determining the middle symbol, select the middle symbol selection table that does not become a similar symbol (probable similar symbol) according to the chance according to the left and right symbols using the table for chance eye prohibition, and select the selected middle symbol It is configured to determine the middle symbol using the table for the game, so it is possible to reliably prevent the symbol similar to the chance symbol from being derived and displayed as the off-line symbol, and the chance eye is derived to the player. It is possible to avoid misunderstanding that it is displayed.

  In addition, in the process of determining the loss with reach, for selecting symbols during super development, which is used when determining the symbols that are out of super-reach, rather than the table for selecting symbols during out-of-normal situations, when determining the symbols that are out of normal. In the table, the determination values are distributed so that the symbol difference with respect to the left and right symbols decreases at a higher rate. In other words, in the symbol selection table (H-4) during normal deviation shown in FIG. 79, the number of determination values assigned to the symbol differences “−1” and “+1” is 4 or 5, but FIG. In the super development time symbol selection table (H-5) shown, the number of determination values distributed to the symbol differences “−1” and “+1” is 7 or 8. Therefore, depending on the fluctuation pattern such as normal reach or super reach, for example, it is possible to vary the ratio of the reach out-of-reach symbol (for example, a one-frame misaligned symbol) that is close to the big hit symbol.

  Also, in the reach determination loss determination process, the middle symbol selection table used for determining the off symbol in the normal mode rather than the symbol selection table in the normal mode rather than the off symbol reach during symbol mode used in the story mode. On the other hand, the determination values are distributed so that the symbol difference with respect to the left and right symbols decreases at a higher rate. That is, in the symbol selection table (BH-3) during the missed reach shown in FIG. 75, the judgment values are not distributed to the symbol differences “−3” to “+2” (“*” is displayed in the story mode). Since “−2” and “+2” are shifted by one frame on the display), in the normal selection during symbol selection table (H-4) shown in FIG. 79, the symbol during super development shown in FIG. In the selection table (H-5), the determination values are also distributed to the symbol differences “−1” and “+1”. Therefore, in the story mode, it is possible to reduce the ratio of reaching out-of-reach symbols that are closer to the jackpot symbol than in the normal mode (for example, a one-frame misplaced symbol).

  In addition, when a single reach is established (“S” in the figure) in the symbol selection table (H-4) during normal deviation shown in FIG. 79, which is used when determining a missing symbol after normal reach, double reach is achieved. When the symbol is established (“W” in the figure), the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol is determined by using a table having different determination value allocation ratios, and the middle symbol is determined. Depending on the number of effective lines, the ratio of reaching out-of-reach symbols close to the jackpot symbol (for example, a one-frame misaligned symbol) can be varied. In addition, since the determination value is not distributed to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol in the double reach table, it is possible to prevent the big hit symbol from being reliably derived and displayed.

  Also, the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table used when determining the temporary stop symbol before the execution of the relief effect is better than the normal symbol middle selection symbol table used when determining the lost symbol after normal reach. The determination values are distributed so that the symbol difference with respect to the left and right symbols decreases at a high rate. In other words, in the symbol selection table (H-4) during normal deviation shown in FIG. 79, the number of determination values assigned to the symbol differences “−1” and “+1” is 4 or 5, but FIG. In the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table (F-5) shown, the number of determination values assigned to the symbol differences “−1” and “+1” is 7 or 8. Therefore, for example, if the symbol is a devastating one frame shift, the rate at which the relief effect is executed is high. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player have an interest in the symbols that are out of normal reach.

  Further, when the microcomputer 100 for effect control has received a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot and has missed the symbol information designation command (Y in step S632, N in step S633, S634). N), a non-probable variable symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed (step S635, FIG. 103), and the determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed (step S842). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not a big hit game is generated even if the production control microcomputer 100 misses the design information designation command, and the production control command related to the design of the decorative design. As a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the initialization notification when a predetermined period has elapsed (see steps S1011 to S1015), but ends the initialization notification at another timing. May be. For example, the initialization notification is terminated when the decorative symbol variable display is started for the first time after the initialization notification is started, or the abnormal winning notification designation command is received before the decorative symbol variable display is started. Sometimes the initialization notification may be terminated. Alternatively, the initialization notification may be terminated when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received or when the first effect control command other than the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received after the initialization notification is started. That is, it is preferable that the initialization notification is continued only for a period sufficient for the game store clerk or the like to recognize the initialization notification.

  In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of occurrence of an abnormal winning at the big winning opening depending on whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more in step S255 of FIG. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (when executing the pre-opening process for the big prize opening), the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is not yet opened, so the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more. It may be determined whether or not it is the timing of occurrence of an abnormal prize.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the second start winning opening 14 when the abnormal winning timing occurs (the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more and the value of the normal symbol process flag is other than 3). If a prize is won, it is determined that an abnormal prize has occurred. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and if one game ball wins the second start prize slot 14 at the time of occurrence of an abnormal prize, It may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred.

  In the above-described embodiment, the abnormal winning notification of the same content is performed both when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs and when an abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14 occurs. You may make it perform a prize alert | report. Specifically, an abnormal winning notification designation command transmitted when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs and an abnormal winning notification designation command transmitted when an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 occur are different. A command is used (the address of the command transmission table set in step S259 and the address of the command transmission table set in step S265 are different addresses). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 executes different abnormal winning notifications depending on the type of the abnormal winning notification designation command from the gaming control microcomputer 560. For example, a different notification sound is generated when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs and when an abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14 occurs. Or, when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs, the abnormal notification is made with a loud sound.

  In this embodiment, the case where the winning cumulative number counter is cleared when shifting to the big hit gaming state or when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped is shown. However, the winning cumulative number counter is cleared. The timing is not limited to the timing shown in this embodiment. For example, the winning cumulative number counter may be cleared when a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined time point. In this case, for example, when the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state, the timer measurement is started after first detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14, and the winning is performed after a predetermined period has elapsed. The cumulative number counter may be cleared.

  FIG. 126 and FIG. 127 are flowcharts showing the abnormal winning notification process in the case where the winning cumulative number counter is cleared when a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined time point. In FIG. 126, the processes in steps S251 to S264 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  If the operation result of the logical product is not 0 in step S264, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning cumulative number counter is 0 (step S264a). If the value of the winning cumulative number counter is 0, it is the first time that the winning to the second starting winning port 14 is detected when the second starting winning port 14 is in a state other than the open state. 560 sets a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) in the winning cumulative number measuring timer, and starts the winning cumulative number measuring timer (step S264b). Then, the process proceeds to step S264A. The winning cumulative number measurement timer is a timer for measuring an elapsed time after detecting the winning to the second starting winning port 14 for the first time when the second starting winning port 14 is in a state other than the open state. .

  If the value of the cumulative number of winning prize counter is not 0 in step S264a, it is a case where a winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected once when the second starting winning opening 14 is already in a state other than the open state. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the winning cumulative number measurement timer by 1 (step S264c) and checks whether the winning cumulative number measurement timer has timed out (step S264d). If not timed out, the process proceeds to step S264A. If the time-out has occurred, the game control microcomputer 560 clears the winning cumulative number counter (step S264e), and proceeds to step S264B. That is, since a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed since the first start winning opening 14 was detected for the first time when the second start winning opening 14 was in a state other than the open state, Clear the counter.

  Note that the processes in steps S264A to S266 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  By executing the above processing, the game control microcomputer 560 detects a winning to the second starting winning port 14 for the first time when the second starting winning port 14 is in a state other than the open state. When the elapses, the winning prize counter is cleared. Therefore, it is possible not to accumulate the number of winnings over a longer period than necessary, and to reliably detect an abnormality in winning due to an illegal act on the variable winning ball device 15.

  In addition, when the 2nd start winning opening 14 is in a state other than an open state, the elapsed time after detecting the winning to the 2nd starting winning opening 14 for the first time is not measured, but elapsed time is measured from other time points. May be started, and the cumulative winning number counter may be cleared after a predetermined period. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may start measuring the elapsed time when the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state, and may clear the cumulative prize counter after a predetermined period.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state, the winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected for the first time (when the value of the winning cumulative number counter is 0). Although the case where the winning cumulative number counter is cleared when the elapsed time from the time has passed a predetermined period (1 hour in this example) is shown, the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state. Each time a winning at the start winning opening 14 is detected, the winning cumulative number measurement timer may be restarted. Then, not only when the winning at the second start winning opening 14 is detected for the first time, but every time when the winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in a state other than the open state, the measurement of the cumulative prize counting timer is started. It is possible to clear the winning cumulative number counter when the predetermined time elapses.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery production should be executed based on the content of the fanfare command when the decorative design stop symbol is temporarily determined and displayed (steps S638 and S639). When it is determined that the re-lottery effect should be executed, the probability variation symbol which is the stop symbol after the re-lottery of the decorative symbol is determined (step S640), and the timing for executing the re-lottery effect is determined (step S641). (S645), a re-lottery effect is executed at the determined execution timing (steps S947, S948, S952, S955, S956, S959), and a probability variation symbol that is a stop symbol after re-lottery is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to match the control state inside the gaming machine and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol displayed on the variable display device 9.

  The same control may be performed for other effect control commands. For example, when a fanfare command that can specify the start of a specific gaming state (a jackpot start designation command) is received, if it does not match the symbol information designation command that has already been received (for example, a normal jackpot designation command indicating a normal jackpot When stored, the fanfare 2 designation command indicating the start of the probability variation jackpot is received), for example, the presentation control based on the fanfare command (for example, notification by the rendering device that the probability variation jackpot is) When an ending command (big jack end designation command) that can identify the end of a specific gaming state is received, if it does not match the already received fanfare command (for example, a fanfare 1 designation command indicating the start of a normal jackpot is received) After that, 2 endings that indicate the end of the probable big hit When receiving the command), executes a performance control based on the ending command (e.g., the background of the variable display device 9 on the background corresponding to the probability variation state). In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control of the effect control means from being confused as much as possible with the control of the game control means.

  In the above embodiment, the story mode is set in the short time state and the probable change short time state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the story mode may be set in the probability change state, or the story mode may be set only in the short time state or only in the short time state. Moreover, it is good also as a story mode only for the specific period (for example, 10 fluctuations) in a normal gaming state.

  In addition, the story effect is such that the character moves to the left and right, but may move in a direction other than the left and right (for example, up and down), or may be a story that performs a martial art. In addition, like the sugoroku, there may be continuity in the story before and after.

  In the decorative design variation start process, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the character traveling direction in the story production, but is not limited to the production that does not affect other productions such as the traveling direction. For example, Momotaro may handle a monkey with a kibidango, a monkey will accompany him after the next change, and after that a notice effect may be given, so that an effect that affects other effects may be determined. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the effect of manipulating the monkey as the type of the story effect. Then, after performing the performance to handle the monkey, the reach of the monkey is predicted, and before the performance of manipulating the monkey is performed, the reach is predicted by the background etc. Can be affected.

  Also, in the decorative symbol variation start process of the above embodiment, the effect switching was performed based on the previous effect (traveling direction), whether or not it was a big hit, and a random number value. It is not limited. For example, the traveling direction may be changed from the previous time based on the reception of a specific fluctuation pattern command, or the traveling direction may be changed from the previous time when the number of fluctuations is counted and a predetermined number is reached. It may be.

  In the above embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is in the story mode based on the gaming state confirmed from the content of the background designation command. You may judge. In this case, a common variation pattern command such as the variation numbers 2 and 128 shown in FIGS. 18 to 20 is not provided in the story mode and the normal mode. Also, whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received 100 times from the reception of the ending designation command (A301 (H)) indicating the end of the normal jackpot, and whether or not the ending designation commands A303 (H) and A304 (H) have been received. You may judge based on crab. In this case, a time reduction flag is provided in the RAM, and the time reduction flag is turned on / off to make a determination based on the time reduction flag. When determining whether or not in story mode from the contents of the background specification command, or when determining whether or not in story mode from the contents of the ending specification command, the variation pattern command indicating reach is in story mode And in the normal mode. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a decorative design depending on whether or not the story mode is in effect.

  In the above embodiment, in the reach determination losing determination process, the middle symbol is determined by the difference with respect to the reach symbol in both cases of single reach and double reach. Alternatively, the middle symbol may be determined by a difference with respect to the left symbol or the right symbol in the middle and lower tiers.

  In the above embodiment, the execution timing of the re-lottery effect is set to be during the jackpot game (during the round) or during the ending effect after the jackpot game ends, but after the jackpot game is started, Any timing may be used as long as it is between the end and the start of a new change. For example, the fanfare effect may be in progress or the interval display may be in progress. And it may be comprised so that the execution timing of such a lottery effect may be designated with a symbol information designation command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the case where the symbol information designation command is missed, the non-probable variation symbol is determined and displayed, and whether or not the re-lottery effect is performed according to the content of the fanfare command received thereafter, and Although the execution timing has been confirmed (steps S639 to S645), when the ending command is received, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the re-lottery effect is performed according to the content of the ending command. In this case, the processing in steps S638 to S640 in FIG. 60 may be executed when an ending command is received. In addition, when it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect when the ending command is received, the re-lottery effect must be executed during the ending effect, so the process of determining the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (steps S641 to S641). S645) is not necessary.

  In the above embodiment, the symbol information designation command or the fanfare command is configured to designate whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is started and the execution timing. However, in the symbol information designation command, the re-lottery is performed. You may comprise so that the presence or absence of execution of an effect etc. may not be designated. With such a configuration, the types of symbol information designation commands can be reduced, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. In such a configuration, the production control microcomputer 100 uniquely determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game and the execution timing. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect using a predetermined random number, and executes the re-lottery effect at a predetermined timing based on the determination result.

  In addition, with the symbol information designation command, the presence / absence and execution timing of the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game is designated, and the production control microcomputer 100 independently performs the presence / absence and execution of the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game. It may be configured to determine timing. In such a configuration, it is specified that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending by the symbol information specifying command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 decides uniquely that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, and conversely The symbol information designation command specifies that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may uniquely determine that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the ending. In this case, if the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending and the re-lottery effect is executed even in the ending even though the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit and promoted to the probability variation pattern, the execution timing of the re-lottery effect cannot be matched. Therefore, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, processing for prohibiting the execution of the re-lottery effect during the ending is executed. Specifically, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, a flag indicating that is set, and based on the fact that the flag is set, it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending. Even so, control is performed so that the re-lottery effect is not executed.

  In the above embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed, the non-probable variable symbol is always promoted to the probable variable symbol. However, the re-lottery effect that is not promoted to the probable variable symbol is executed at a predetermined rate. You may make it do. For example, even when a normal jackpot is designated by the symbol information designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 may be configured to use a predetermined random number to independently execute the re-lottery production. .

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 designates only the promotion timing (fluctuating, big hit, or ending) with the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command, and the production control microcomputer 100 always re-starts at the timing designated by the command. The execution control microcomputer 100 redraws the lottery effect (with promotion) with respect to the execution timing of other re-lottery effects before promotion and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect when not promoted (usually in the case of big hit). It may be determined by lottery whether or not to produce (no promotion).

(Embodiment 2)
In the first embodiment, there is one special symbol (“7 (outlined)”), but there may be a plurality of special symbols. Hereinafter, Embodiment 2 in which the decorative symbol “3” is also a special symbol will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the portions having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  First, the jackpot symbol and the sudden probability variation symbol added in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement pattern of the jackpot symbol and the sudden probability variation symbol. As shown in FIG. 128, the combination of the left and right decorative patterns is “3” on the active line, and the decorative patterns in the middle are arranged in a predetermined pattern (“7” “7 (outlined)”). The symbol in the new state is added as a jackpot symbol. Specifically, in FIG. 128, symbols of “11UF”, “11LF”, “11CF”, “11SF”, “11AF”, “12UF”, “12LF”, “12CF”, “12SF”, and “12AF” are added. These jackpot symbols are probabilistic symbols. Also, the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is “3” on the active line, and the decorative symbol in the middle is a symbol other than the predetermined symbol (“1” “2” “4” “5” “6” ) (Except for “3”: originally because it is a probabilistic symbol) The symbols in the same state are suddenly added as a probable symbol. Specifically, in FIG. 128, symbols “56T” to “68T”, “70T” to “80T” are added. Note that “69T” is a big hit symbol and is not used.

  In the present embodiment, the determination values assigned to the reach symbol selection table, the sudden probability variation symbol selection table, and the jackpot symbol selection table are different from those of the first embodiment. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the single reach symbol selection table (BH-2) used in step S1024 in the reach determination loss determination process (see FIGS. 72 and 73) is shown in FIG. As described above, not only the reach symbol (8CH) but also the reach symbol (3CH) is a symbol for determining the big hit, so no determination value is assigned.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reach reach selection table (H-1) used in step S1028 of the reach loss determination process includes a reach symbol (8UH, 8LH, 8CH, as shown in FIG. 130). 8WH) as well as the reach symbols (3UH, 3LH, 3CH, 3WH) are symbols that have been determined to be big hits, so no judgment value is assigned.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the single reach symbol selection table (H-2) used in step S1033 of the reach / losing determination process includes a reach symbol (8UH, 8LH, 8CH) as shown in FIG. Not only the reach symbols (3UH, 3LH, 3CH) are symbols of big hits, but no judgment value is assigned. Further, in the double reach design selection table (H-3) used in step S1034, in the present embodiment, not only the reach design (1WH, 8WH) but also the reach design (3WH, 4WH) is also a big hit confirmed symbol, so no judgment value is assigned. In this way, when reaching a detachment, a special symbol is prevented from reaching.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the sudden probability variation symbol selection table (F-26) used in step S1087 of the sudden probability variation symbol determination process (see FIG. 87) is abrupt as shown in FIG. 133 (A). A plurality of determination values are also assigned to the probability variation symbols “56T” to “68T”, “70T” to “80T”. Thereby, in this Embodiment, the symbol of "56T"-"68T" "70T"-"80T" can be selected as a sudden probability variable symbol. In the single sudden probability variable symbol selection table (F-27) used in step S1086, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), the sudden probability variable symbols “58T” “63T” “ A plurality of determination values are also assigned to 68T, 73T, and 78T. Thereby, in this embodiment, the symbols “58T”, “63T”, “68T”, “73T”, and “78T” can be selected as the sudden probability variation symbols.

  In the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) used in step S1136 of the combined pattern probability variation symbol determination process (see FIGS. 90 and 91), in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Among the jackpot symbols, a plurality of determination values are also assigned to the probability variation symbols (11UF, 11LF, 11CF, 11SF, 12UF, 12LF, 12CF, 12SF). Thereby, in this embodiment, the symbols “11UF”, “11LF”, “11CF”, “11SF”, “12UF”, “12LF”, “12CF”, and “12SF” can be selected as the probability variation symbols. The common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) is also used in step S692 of the missed probability variation symbol determination process (FIG. 104).

  In the single jackpot symbol selection table (F-8) used in step S1138 of the combined pattern probability variable symbol determination process, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11UF, 11LF, 11CF, 12UF, 12LF, 12CF) are also assigned a plurality of determination values. Thereby, in this Embodiment, the symbol of "11UF" "11LF" "11CF" "12UF" "12LF" "12CF" can be selected as a probability variable symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the double after hit big hit symbol selection table (F-16) used in step S1139 of the combined pattern probability variable symbol determination process, as shown in FIG. A plurality of determination values are also assigned to the symbols (11AF, 12AF). Thereby, in the present embodiment, the symbols “11AF” and “12AF” can be selected as the probability variation symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the single big hit symbol selection table (BF-8) used in the step S1134 of the combined pattern probability variable symbol determination process, as shown in FIG. 11CF, 12CF) are also assigned a plurality of determination values. Thereby, in this Embodiment, the symbol of "11CF" "12CF" can be selected as a probability variable symbol.

  As described above, a plurality of special symbols can be prepared. In the present embodiment, the special symbol “7 (outlined)” is selected as the ratio that the special symbol “3” is selected as the left symbol when a big hit (suddenly probable big hit, probable big hit) is selected. The determination value is assigned to each table so as to be higher than the ratio (see FIGS. 133 to 137). On the other hand, when there is a shift without reach, each table is determined such that the ratio of selecting “3” of the special symbol as the left symbol is lower than the ratio of selecting “7 (white)” of the special symbol. Values are assigned (see FIGS. 64 and 68). That is, the ratio X1 that the special symbol “3” is selected as the left symbol when there is a shift without reach, and the special symbol “7 (white)” is selected as the left symbol when there is a shift without reach. When the ratio X2 is a big win, the special symbol “3” is selected as the left symbol when the big win is selected, and when the big hit is the special symbol “7 (outlined)” is selected as the left symbol The ratio X3 is configured to satisfy the relationship of X1 / X3 <X2 / X4.

  Specifically, for example, the ratio X1 at which the special symbol “3” is selected as the left symbol in the left symbol selection table (T-1) shown in FIG. 64 is 9/67 (displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows). Sum of percentages). The ratio X2 at which the special symbol “7 (outlined)” is selected as the left symbol in the left symbol selection table (T-1) is 21/67 (sum of the ratios displayed in the upper, middle, and lower levels). In addition, the ratio X3 at which the special symbol “3” is selected as the left symbol in the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 134 is 83/131 (3UF, 3LF, 3CF, 3SF, 11UF). , 11LF, 11CF, 11SF, 12UF, 12LF, 12CF, and 12SF are selected). The ratio X4 at which the special symbol “7 (outlined)” is selected as the left symbol in the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) is 12/131 (8UF, 8LF, 8CF, 8SF, 9UF, 9LF, 9CF, 9SF, 10UF, 10LF, 10CF, 10SF is the sum of the ratios selected). Therefore, it is configured to satisfy the relationship of X1 / X3 <X2 / X4 (X1 / X3≈0.21, X2 / X4≈3.42). As described above, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of special symbols (“3” and “7 (outlined)”) are prepared and there is a shift without reach, “3” is displayed on the left symbol that stops first. The ratio X1 for selecting “7” is lower than the ratio X2 for selecting “7 (outlined)”. Then, when a big hit is made, the ratio X3 at which “3” is selected for the left symbol is higher than the ratio X4 at which “7 (outlined)” is selected. In other words, even when the same special symbol is used, the expectation of a big hit can be increased when “3” is stopped in the left symbol than when “7 (outlined)” is stopped. Can be planned. In this embodiment, when there is a shift without reach, the ratio X1 at which “3” is selected for the left symbol that stops first is lower than the ratio X2 at which “7 (outlined)” is selected. However, X1 and X2 may be equal if the condition X1 / X3 <X2 / X4 is satisfied. In this case, X3 and X4 need only satisfy the condition of X3> X4. That is, when the big win is achieved, the ratio X3 for selecting “3” for the left symbol is selected as “7 (outlined)”. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that it may become higher than the ratio X4 to be performed.

(Embodiment 3)
In the first embodiment, the case where the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects the occurrence of an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 or the big winning opening has been described, but the occurrence of an abnormal winning at the production control microcomputer 100 side. May be detected. The third embodiment in which the occurrence of an abnormal winning in the second start winning opening 14 or the big winning opening is detected on the side of the production control microcomputer 100 will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, the detailed description of the portions having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  First, the operation of the game control means (game control microcomputer 560) will be described. FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 80 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 138, in this embodiment, instead of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command and abnormal winning notification 2 designation command shown in the first embodiment, a winning detection designation command and abnormal winning detection designation are provided as effect control commands. A command is used. The other effect control commands are the same as the effect control commands shown in the first embodiment.

  Command D002 (H) is an effect control command (winning detection designation command) that designates that a winning of a game ball at the big winning opening has been detected. The command D003 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning detection detection designation command) for designating that a winning of a game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected when the second starting winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state. ).

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning notification process of step S23 in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S251 to S254 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. If the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set in step S251, or if the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset in step S254, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the process of step S255 described in the first embodiment. Without performing this, the process of loading the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register is performed as it is (step S256). That is, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not perform a process of determining whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more (whether or not a big hit game is being played).

  In FIG. 139, the processes in steps S256 to S258 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  If the result of the logical product is not 0 in step S258 (N in step S258), it is determined that the game ball has won a winning prize opening, and control for transmitting a winning detection designation command is performed (steps S259A and S260). . That is, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the winning detection designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S259A), and executes the command setting process (step S260). On the other hand, if the result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S258), it is determined that no game ball has been won in the big prize opening, and the process proceeds to step S261.

  In FIG. 139, the processes in steps S261 to S264 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  When the logical product is not 0 (N in step S264), the second start winning port 14 is in the state other than the open state (including the state of the predetermined interval period), but the second start This is a case where a game ball has won the winning opening 14. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a win has occurred in the second start winning port 14 despite the second start winning port 14 being in a state other than the open state, Control for transmitting an abnormal winning detection designation command is performed (steps S265A and S266). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the abnormal winning detection designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S265A), and executes the command setting process (step S266). On the other hand, if the result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S264), the abnormal winning notification process is terminated without performing control for transmitting the abnormal winning detection designation command.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes the process of step S493A in the power-off process (see FIG. 12) and the special symbol stop process (FIG. 29) among the processes shown in the first embodiment. The process of step S367A in the reference) and the process of step S282 in the prize ball number adding process (see FIG. 54) are not executed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means (the effect control microcomputer 100) will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the production control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the production control CPU 101) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the power-off signal from the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board is input to the effect control board 80 in addition to the main board 31. For example, when a power-off signal is output from a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board, the output power-off signal is branched into two, one being input to the main board 31 and the other being the effect control board 80. Is input. Further, for example, the power-off signal output from the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board may be first input to the main board 31 and further input to the effect control board 80 via the main board 31.

  140, the processes in steps S701 to S703 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  When the timer interrupt flag is cleared in step S703, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the power-off signal is output (whether or not it is turned on) (step S703A). If it is in the on state, the production control microcomputer 100 clears the abnormal winning cumulative number counter (step S703B). The abnormal winning cumulative number counter is a counter for counting the cumulative number of receiving the abnormal winning detection designation command. In this embodiment, the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is used when determining the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14, as will be described later.

  140, the processes in steps S704 to S707 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  When the above processing is executed, the production control microcomputer 100, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (when the power-off confirmation signal is confirmed to be on), the abnormal winning cumulative number counter To clear. Therefore, it is possible not to accumulate the number of winnings over a longer period than necessary, and to reliably detect an abnormality in winning due to an illegal act on the variable winning ball device 15. In addition, the cumulative number of winnings can be cleared by turning off the power of the gaming machine, and the abnormality notification can be easily reset.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing (step S704) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S611 to S666 in the command analysis process are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  If the received effect control command is a winning detection designation command (D002 (H)) (step S668A), the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more (step S668A). S668B). When the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more (Y in step S668B), the game is in a big hit game. If it is in such a state, there is a possibility that a game ball may win the big prize opening. Therefore, it is determined that no abnormal winning has occurred in the big prize opening, and the process proceeds to step S669A.

  The state where the value of the effect control process flag is less than 4 is a state where no big hit game is played. If a winning detection designation command is received in such a state (that is, that a game ball has been won at the big winning opening), it can be determined that the winning is an abnormal winning. For this reason, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that an abnormal winning at the special winning opening has occurred, and determines to perform an abnormal winning notification. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormal winning notification 2 determination flag (step S668C). The abnormal winning notification 2 determination flag is a flag indicating that it has been determined to perform abnormal winning notification based on the detection of an abnormal winning to the big winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal prize detection designation command (D003 (H)) (step S669A), the effect control microcomputer 100 adds 1 to the value of the abnormal prize accumulation number counter (step S669B). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the abnormal prize cumulative number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 in this example) (step S669C). If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14, and determines to notify the abnormal winning. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormal winning notification 1 determination flag (step S669D). The abnormal winning notification 1 determination flag is a flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification is determined based on the detection of the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14.

  If the received effect control command is another command (N in step S669A), effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S678). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol fluctuation stopping process (step S803) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 142, the processes in steps S841 to S847 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, when the process timer is started in step S847, the production control microcomputer 100 clears the abnormal winning cumulative number counter (step S847A), and the value of the production control process flag is displayed as a jackpot display process (step S804). ) Is updated to a value corresponding to (step S848).

  In FIG. 142, the processes in steps S849 and S850 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, by executing the above processing, the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is cleared when the big winning gaming state or the small winning state is entered. Therefore, it is possible not to accumulate the number of winnings over a longer period than necessary, and to reliably detect an abnormality in winning due to an illegal act on the variable winning ball device 15.

  In this embodiment, the case where the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is cleared at the start of the big hit gaming state is shown. However, when the big winning gaming state is entered, the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is cleared at another timing. May be. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may clear the abnormal winning cumulative number counter when ending the jackpot gaming state. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 clears the abnormal winning accumulation counter after executing the process of step S974 in the big hit end production process, and changes the value of the production process flag to the variation pattern command reception waiting process ( It may be updated (see step S975) to a value (specifically “0”) corresponding to step S800).

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating notification control processing in step S707 according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 143, the processes in steps S1011 to S1015 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  In step S1016A, whether or not the abnormal winning notification 2 determination flag indicating that it has determined that the abnormal winning notification is to be performed based on the detection of the abnormal winning at the special winning opening is set in the production control microcomputer 100 is set. (Step S1016A). If not set (N in step S1016A), the process proceeds to step S1018A. If the abnormal winning notification 2 determination flag is set (Y in step S1016A), the abnormal winning notification 2 determination flag is reset (step S1017A), and the process proceeds to step S1022. That is, the fact that the abnormal winning notification 2 determination flag is set is a case where an abnormal winning to the big winning opening is detected. In this case, an abnormality due to only sound output is performed by executing step S1022 described later. A winning notification is executed.

  In step S1018A, the abnormal winning notification 1 determination flag indicating that the production control microcomputer 100 has determined to perform the abnormal winning notification based on the detection of the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is set. It is confirmed whether or not (step S1018A). If it is not set (N in step S1018A), the process ends. If the abnormal winning notification 1 determination flag is set (Y in step S1018A), the abnormal winning notification 1 determination flag is reset (step S1019A).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the value of the abnormal prize accumulation number counter is 5 (that is, whether or not the abnormal prize detection designation command has been received five times) (step S1021A). In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, when an abnormal winning detection designation command is received, when the value of the abnormal winning cumulative number counter becomes equal to or larger than a predetermined value (5 in this example), the abnormal winning notification 1 determination flag is displayed. Is set (see steps S669A to S669D). That is, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the abnormal winning notification 1 determination flag when receiving the abnormal winning detection designation command five times or more. Therefore, in the notification control process, if the abnormal winning notification 1 determination flag is set in step S1018A, the abnormal winning cumulative number counter should be set to a value of 5 or more. In this embodiment, in step S1021A, first, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is five.

  If the value of the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is 5 (Y in Step S1021A), the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the audio output board 70 (Step S1021A). S1022). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) corresponding to notification of abnormal winning is performed thereafter. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1029).

  If the value of the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is not 5 (N in step S1021A), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the abnormal winning cumulative number counter value is 6 (that is, an abnormal winning detection designation command is issued). It is confirmed whether it has been received six times (step S1023A). If the value of the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is 6 (Y in Step S1023A), the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the audio output board 70 (Step S1023A). S1024A). In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs lamp control execution data indicating lamp display corresponding to the abnormal winning notification to the lamp driver board 35 (step S1025). Therefore, thereafter, lamp display and sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the notification of abnormal winning is performed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1029).

  If the value of the abnormal prize accumulation number counter is not 6 (that is, if the value of the abnormal prize accumulation number counter is 7 or more (if the abnormal prize detection designation command is received 7 times or more)) (N in step S1023A) ), The production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound data indicating the sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S1026). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs lamp control execution data indicating lamp display in response to the abnormal winning notification to the lamp driver board 35 (step S1027). Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a command to the VDP 109 to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time in the variable display device 9 (step S1028). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays the abnormality notification screen on the variable display device 9 according to the command (see FIG. 117C). Therefore, after that, lamp display and sound output (output of the abnormal notification sound) according to the notification of the abnormal winning is performed, and the abnormality notification screen is superimposed on the variable display device 9. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S1029).

  By performing the above processing, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the abnormal winning notification based on the determination that the abnormal winning notification is performed in the command analysis processing. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives an abnormal winning detection designation command after receiving the abnormal winning detection notification based on the reception of the abnormal winning detection designation command five times, the abnormal winning detection designation command is displayed. The notification mode of the abnormal winning notification is switched according to the number of receptions (specifically, the value of the abnormal winning cumulative number counter). That is, in this embodiment, when the abnormal winning detection designation command is accumulated and received five times, the abnormal winning notification is executed using only the sound output. When the abnormal winning detection designation command is accumulated and received six times, the abnormal winning notification is executed using the lamp display in addition to the sound output. Further, when the abnormal winning detection designation command is accumulated and received seven times or more, in addition to the lamp display and sound output, the abnormal winning notification is executed by superimposing the abnormal notification screen.

  It should be noted that the notification mode of the abnormal prize notification shown in this embodiment is merely an example, for example, by changing the abnormality notification sound to be output or changing the display pattern (for example, lighting or blinking) of the lamp. The notification mode of the winning notification may be switched. Further, in this embodiment, the case has been described in which the notification mode of the abnormal winning notification is switched according to the number of times of receiving the abnormal winning detection designation command. However, when the abnormal winning detection designation command is accumulated and received five times, In addition to the output, the abnormality winning notification may be performed using all of the abnormality notification screen display and the lamp display. In this case, when the production control microcomputer 100 accumulates and receives the abnormal winning detection designation command five times, it performs output control of the abnormality notification sound using the speaker 27 and superimposes the abnormality notification screen on the variable display device 9. Display is performed, and display control of abnormal display using the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the abnormal winning notification is executed using only the sound output when the abnormal winning detection designation command is accumulated and received five times is shown. The present invention is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the abnormal winning detection designation command is accumulated and received five times, the abnormality display screen may be superimposed on the variable display device 9, and display of the abnormal display using the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c. Control may be performed. Further, the abnormality notification effect may be performed using any two or all of the abnormality notification screen superimposed display, sound output, or abnormality display using the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c.

  FIG. 144 is a timing diagram showing a detection timing for detecting an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 and a notification timing for executing an abnormal winning notification in the third embodiment. FIG. 144 shows, as an example, a case where the second start winning opening 14 is opened and closed based on the opening pattern in the low base state. The same applies to the case where the second start winning opening 14 is opened and closed based on the opening pattern in the high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the game control microcomputer 560 operates when the second start winning opening 14 is in an open state (a state in which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is physically open and a predetermined interval period (in this example, 1 second), the game is processed as a normal winning when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected (the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on). When the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state (see step S261), when a game ball winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (the second start opening switch 14a is turned on) is detected. (Refer to step S264), it is determined that there is an abnormal winning, and an abnormal winning detection designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S265A and S266).

  When receiving the abnormal winning detection designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 increments the value of the abnormal winning cumulative number counter (see step S669B). Then, when the number of times of receiving the abnormal winning detection designation command is accumulated and reaches a predetermined number (in this example, five times) (see step S669C), it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14, and an abnormal Start winning notification. In this case, when the number of times the abnormal winning detection designation command is received is five (see step S1021A), abnormal winning notification is executed by controlling the speaker 27 to output an abnormal notification sound. (See step S1022).

  If the game control microcomputer 560 detects the winning of the game ball again after transmitting the abnormal winning detection designation command and the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state, the abnormal winning is repeatedly performed. A detection designation command is transmitted (see steps S265A and S266).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 changes the notification mode of the abnormal winning notification according to the number of times the abnormal winning detection designation command is accumulated and received. In this case, when the abnormal winning detection designation command is accumulated and received six times (see step S1023A), in addition to controlling the speaker 27 to output the abnormal notification sound, the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c By controlling to display an abnormality notification display (for example, blinking) using, the notification mode of the abnormal winning notification is changed (see steps S1024 and S1025). When the abnormal winning detection designation command is accumulated and received seven times or more (see step S1023A), control is performed so as to output an abnormal alarm sound from the speaker 27, and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c are controlled. In addition to controlling to display the used abnormality notification display (for example, blinking), the control method for superimposing and displaying the abnormal winning notification screen on the variable display device 9 is performed to change the notification mode of the abnormal winning notification (step) S1026 to S1028).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the open / close state of the variable winning ball device 15 and determines that the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state other than the open state. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state other than the open state based on the fact that the winning detection signal is input to the second starting winning port 14 at the time, a game ball is placed in the second starting winning port 14. An abnormal prize detection designation command indicating that a prize has been won is transmitted. Based on the abnormal winning detection designation command transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the cumulative number of winning game balls won in the second start winning opening 14 in the abnormal winning cumulative number counter. . Further, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on a predetermined abnormal winning number reference value (5 in this example) for determining whether or not it is an abnormal winning number, and the cumulative winning number stored in the abnormal winning cumulative number counter. It is then determined whether or not it is an abnormal winning state. Then, when it is determined that the production control microcomputer 100 is in the abnormal winning state, the production device performs abnormality notification. Further, in this case, the production control microcomputer 100 can execute abnormality notification even when the variable display device 9 performs variable display of decorative symbols. Accordingly, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to notify that a prize abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act on the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and as a result, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act on the variable winning ball apparatus 15. it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to detect an abnormality in winning due to an illegal act on the variable winning ball apparatus 15 without increasing the processing load of the game control microcomputer 560. Further, since it is determined whether or not the abnormal winning state is based on the cumulative number of winnings, for example, when the variable winning ball device 15 is accidentally won only once or due to the influence of noise. It is possible to prevent a situation where an abnormal winning state is determined when a winning is detected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a winning abnormality is notified due to a malfunction.

  In this embodiment, the case where the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is cleared when the game state is changed to the big hit gaming state or when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped is shown. The timing for clearing is not limited to the timing shown in this embodiment. For example, the abnormal winning cumulative number counter may be cleared when a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined time point. In this case, for example, when the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state, the timer measurement is started after first detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14, and the winning is performed after a predetermined period has elapsed. The cumulative number counter may be cleared.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in the case where the abnormal prize accumulation number counter is cleared when a predetermined period has elapsed from a predetermined time point. In FIG. 145, the processing in steps S611 to S666 is the same as those shown in the first embodiment. Further, the processing of steps S668A to S668C is the same as those processing shown in FIG.

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal prize detection designation command (D003 (H)) (step S669A), the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the value of the abnormal prize accumulation number counter is zero. (Step S669a). If the value of the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is 0 (Y in step S669a), the winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected for the first time when the second starting winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state, and the abnormal winning prize is detected. Since it is a case where the detection designation command is received for the first time, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) in the abnormal prize accumulation number measurement timer and starts the abnormal prize accumulation number measurement timer (step S669b). ). Then, control goes to a step S669B. It should be noted that the abnormal winning cumulative number measuring timer has not received an abnormal winning detection designation command for the first time when a winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected for the first time when the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state. It is a timer for measuring the elapsed time.

  If the value of the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is not 0 in step S669a (N in step S669a), when the second starting winning port 14 is already in a state other than the open state, the second starting winning port 14 is once won. This is a case where an abnormal winning detection designation command has been received once. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the abnormal winning cumulative number measurement timer (step S669c) and confirms whether the abnormal winning cumulative number measurement timer has timed out (step S669d). If not timed out (N in step S669d), the process proceeds to step S669B. If time-out has occurred (Y in step S669d), the production control microcomputer 100 clears the abnormal winning accumulation counter (step S669e), and proceeds to step S669C. That is, when the second start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state, a win to the second start winning opening 14 is detected, and a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed since the abnormal winning detection designation command was received for the first time. Since this is the case, the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is cleared.

  Note that the processes in steps S669B to S669D and S678 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  By executing the above processing, the production control microcomputer 100 detects the winning to the second start winning opening 14 for the first time when the second starting winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state, and detects an abnormal winning. When a predetermined period elapses after receiving the designated command for the first time, the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is cleared. Therefore, it is possible not to accumulate the number of winnings over a longer period than necessary, and to reliably detect an abnormality in winning due to an illegal act on the variable winning ball device 15.

  Note that it is not possible to measure the elapsed time since the first winning prize opening 14 is detected for the first time when the second starting prize opening 14 is in a state other than the open state, and the first abnormal winning detection designation command is received. Instead, the measurement of the elapsed time may be started from another time point, and the abnormal winning cumulative number counter may be cleared after a predetermined period has elapsed. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may start measuring the elapsed time when the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state, and may clear the abnormal winning cumulative number counter after a predetermined period.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the abnormal winning cumulative number counter is cleared when the elapsed time from the first reception of the abnormal winning detection designation command has passed a predetermined period (1 hour in this example) is shown. Each time an abnormal winning detection designation command is received, the abnormal winning cumulative number measurement timer may be restarted. Then, not only when the abnormal winning detection designation command is received for the first time, but every time an abnormal winning detection designation command is received, the abnormal winning cumulative number measurement timer starts to be measured. The cumulative number counter may be cleared.

  In the third embodiment described above, both the process for detecting the abnormal winning at the big winning opening and the process for detecting the abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 on the production control microcomputer 100 side are performed. Although the case where it performs is shown, you may be made to perform only either one by the microcomputer 100 for presentation control. For example, the process for detecting an abnormal winning at the big winning opening is executed on the game control microcomputer 560 side according to the same process as in the first embodiment, and an abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is detected. Only the processing may be executed on the production control microcomputer 100 side. Further, for example, the process for detecting an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 is executed on the game control microcomputer 560 side according to the same process as in the first embodiment, and the abnormal winning at the big winning opening is made. Only the processing to be detected may be executed on the production control microcomputer 100 side.

  In the third embodiment described above, the timing at which the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 14 (ON of the second start opening switch 14a) is detected is other than the second start winning opening 14 being in the open state. The game control microcomputer 560 side determines whether or not it is in the state (see step S261), but the timing at which the game ball winning at the second start winning opening 14 is detected is the second. Whether or not the start winning opening 14 is in a state other than the open state may be determined by the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects the ON state of the second start winning port 14 without performing the process of step S261 in the abnormal winning notification process, the game control microcomputer 560 directly receives a prize to the second start winning port 14. Alternatively, a detection designation command indicating that an error has been detected may be transmitted. Then, when receiving the detection designation command in the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) is in the open / close operation state. If the electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) is in the open / close operation, the processing of steps S669B to S669D may be executed.

(Embodiment 4)
In the first embodiment described above, even when it is detected that an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 or the variation of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 It was configured to run continuously. Accordingly, when a game ball is won in the second start winning opening 14 illegally (for example, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened illegally even though the normal symbol is not a winning pattern, and the second starting winning opening 14 is opened. Even when a game ball is won), a big hit may occur due to the start winning, and the ball may be illegally acquired. Therefore, the fourth embodiment is configured to stop the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol at a predetermined timing when it is detected that the abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. ing.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing special symbol process processing according to the fourth embodiment. In the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decides to execute the abnormal winning notification based on the determination that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 or the big winning opening. It is confirmed whether or not the abnormal winning notification flag indicating that the game has been performed is set (step S319A). Here, the abnormal winning notification flag is used when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening is detected (step S258A in FIG. 56) or when an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 is detected (step in FIG. 56). S264C).

  When the abnormal winning notification flag is set (Y in step S319A), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the special symbol is changed in the special symbol display 8, specifically, the special symbol process. It is determined whether or not the flag value is a value (“2”) indicating the special symbol changing process (step S302) (step S319B). When the value of the special symbol process flag is a value (“2”) indicating the special symbol changing process (Y in Step S319B), the processing after Step S311 is executed. That is, the special symbol display 8 causes the special symbol to be continuously changed. On the other hand, when the value of the special symbol process flag is not a value (“2”) indicating the special symbol changing process (N in Step S319B), the special symbol process process is terminated. That is, the special symbol display control 8 stops the variation control of the special symbol. With such a configuration, when an abnormal winning to the big winning opening or the second start winning opening 14 is detected, if the special symbol is not changing, the special symbol is immediately prohibited from being changed and the special symbol is changing. If it is, the change of the special symbol is continued and the change of the next special symbol is prohibited.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing effect control process processing in the fourth embodiment. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first confirms whether or not the abnormality notification flag is set (step S809A). When the abnormality notifying flag is set (Y in step S809A), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the decorative symbol is changed in the variable display device 9, specifically, the effect control process flag. It is determined whether or not the value is a value (“2”) indicating the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) (step S809B). If the value of the effect control process flag is a value (“2”) indicating the decorative symbol variation process (Y in step S809B), the decorative symbol variation processing (step S802) is executed. That is, the decorative display pattern is continuously changed in the variable display device 9. On the other hand, when the value of the effect control process flag is not a value (“2”) indicating the decorative symbol variation process (N in step S809B), the effect control process process is terminated. In other words, the decorative display variation control is stopped in the variable display device 9. With such a configuration, when the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command or the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command is received, if the decorative design is not changing, the decorative design is immediately prohibited from changing, and the decorative design is changing. If this happens, the variation of the decorative design is continued, and the variation of the next decorative design is prohibited.

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display 8 and the decoration in the variable display device 9 based on the detection of the abnormal winning in the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14. Since the control for prohibiting the fluctuation of the symbol is executed, when the winning to the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 14 is generated by an illegal act (for example, it is variable even though the normal symbol is not a winning symbol) Even when the winning ball apparatus 15 is opened and the game ball is awarded to the second start winning opening 14), it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of a big hit based on the winning.

  In the fourth embodiment, whether the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating the special symbol changing process, and the value of the effect control process flag is a value indicating the decorative symbol changing process. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the abnormal winning notification flag is set, and during the abnormal notification flag When is set, control for prohibiting the fluctuation of the symbol may be performed immediately. Further, the number of reserved memories at the time when an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected is confirmed, and the variation of the symbols is continued until the variation of the symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories is completed. When the variation of the symbol is finished, control for prohibiting the variation of the symbol may be performed. Specifically, when the abnormal winning notification flag is set, the number of reserved memories is confirmed, and a counter is used to count whether or not a change corresponding to the confirmed number of reserved memories has been executed. Control that prohibits fluctuations is sometimes executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to continue the fluctuation based on the start winning to the normal second start winning opening 14 and prohibit the fluctuation based on the abnormal winning. In the above configuration, in the case of prohibiting the variation of the symbol based on the abnormal winning correctly, the variation of the symbol is prohibited at the time when the variation of the reserved memory number -1 minute when the abnormal winning is detected is finished. You may do it.

  Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is prohibited when the abnormal winning is detected in the configuration in which the abnormal winning is determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side is shown. In the configuration in which the abnormal winning is determined on the microcomputer 100 side (see the third embodiment), the variation of the decorative pattern may be prohibited when the abnormal winning is detected. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the abnormality notification processing flag and does not change the decorative design according to the same process as the effect control process shown in FIG. 147 (step S809A, (See S809B), it is only necessary to prohibit the variation of the decorative pattern by ending the effect control process as it is.

(Embodiment 5)
In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, by checking whether the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value (“3”) indicating the normal electric accessory actuating process, the second timing is determined at a normal timing. It was determined whether or not a winning at the start winning opening 14 occurred (see steps S261 to S264 in FIG. 56). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and by confirming whether or not a winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred at the timing when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the second time at a normal timing. It may be determined whether or not a winning at the start winning opening 14 has occurred.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory operating process in the fifth embodiment. In the normal electric actor operation process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S161). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S161), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S162).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal electric accessory release pattern timer by -1 (step S181). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer is 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer has timed out (step S182). If not timed out (N in step S182), the process is terminated as it is. If time-out has occurred (Y in step S182), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the release pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer (step S183). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, for example, by confirming the normal electric accessory solenoid output bit of the output port buffer (solenoid buffer) (step S184). .

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is closed (Y in step S184), the game control microcomputer 560 performs control for driving the solenoid 16 to open the variable winning ball device 15 (step S185). And since this timing is not the timing at which a game ball normally wins in the second start winning opening 14, a process for checking whether or not an abnormal winning in the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred is performed. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the switch-on buffer into the register (step S187). The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (step S188). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14).

  If 1 is not set in the second start port switch input bit (N in step S188), the process ends. If 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (Y in step S188), the second start port switch 14a is turned on at an incorrect timing, so that the game control microcomputer 560 accumulates winnings. The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S188A), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accumulated prize counter after the addition is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (5 in this example) (step S188B). If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14, sets an abnormal winning notification flag (step S188C), and the effect control board 80. Then, control for transmitting the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (steps S189 and S190). That is, the address of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command transmission table is set in the pointer (step S189), and the command setting process is executed (step S190).

  When the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is being opened in step S184 (N in step S184), the game control microcomputer 560 performs control for driving the solenoid 16 to close the variable winning ball apparatus 15 (step S186). ). Since this timing is a timing at which a game ball normally wins at the second start winning opening 14, the process for checking whether or not an abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred is not performed.

  In step S161, when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S161), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S100) (specifically, Is updated to "0") (step S172).

  148, the processing corresponding to steps S164 to S167 (ordinary electric winning prize winning count processing) of the ordinary electric accessory operating process shown in FIG. 45 is not shown in the ordinary electric accessory operating process shown in FIG. The normal electric accessory operation process shown in FIG. 148 may be executed in the same manner. In addition, when the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected in the ordinary electric accessory operating process shown in FIG. 148, it is necessary to execute steps S261 to S266 of the abnormal winning notification process shown in FIG. There is no.

  According to the configuration as described above, since the abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected at the closing timing of the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the more accurate timing to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected. Abnormal winnings can be detected.

  As described in the first embodiment, in the fifth embodiment, the timing for determining an abnormal winning may be delayed from the timing for closing the variable winning ball device 15. For example, a timer is started when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 changes from an open state to a closed state (that is, when N changes to Y in step S184), and when the timer times out, steps S187 to S187 are started. The process of S190 is executed. According to such a method, it can be prevented that it is erroneously determined that an abnormal winning has occurred even though the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 at regular timing.

  Further, in the above-described fifth embodiment, whether or not a winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred at the timing when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed in the configuration in which an abnormal winning is determined on the gaming control microcomputer 560 side. However, in the configuration in which the abnormal winning is determined on the side of the production control microcomputer 100 (see the third embodiment), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed to the second start winning opening 14 at the timing when it is closed. It may be possible to check whether or not a prize has occurred. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 does not perform the abnormal winning determination process in steps S188A to S188C as long as 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit in step S188, and designates abnormal winning detection as it is. Control to send a command may be performed.

(Embodiment 6)
In the above-described first embodiment, when the number of winning balls is awarded to the second start winning opening 14 and the abnormal winning notification flag is set in the winning ball number adding process shown in FIG. 54 (step S282), By configuring so that the number of prize balls is not added to the prize ball number storage buffer, the prize balls are not paid out based on abnormal winnings. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. When an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 is detected in the switch process, the winning itself may be invalidated.

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart illustrating switch processing according to the sixth embodiment. In the switch processing, steps S331 to S338 are the same as the processing described in FIG. After executing the process of step S338, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the abnormal winning notification flag is set (step S338A). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) is being opened (step S339). Here, whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is open can be determined by, for example, checking the normal electric accessory solenoid output bit of the output port buffer (solenoid buffer).

  When the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is being opened (Y in step S339), the process is ended as it is. When the variable winning ball device 15 is not open but closed (N in step S339), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the second start port switch input bit (in the second start port switch 14a) of the switch-on buffer. The corresponding bit) is cleared (0) (step S340). As a result, when an abnormal winning is made to the second starting winning opening 14, the starting winning itself can be invalidated. In this case, it is not necessary to execute a process for preventing the prize ball number from being added to the total prize ball number storage buffer when an abnormal winning to the second starting prize opening 14 occurs in the prize ball number addition process. .

  In step S339, it is confirmed whether or not the ordinary electric accessory is being opened, but it is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value ("3") indicating the ordinary electric accessory operation process. The second start winning prize may be invalidated.

  Further, as described in the fifth embodiment, the timing for determining the abnormal winning may be delayed from the timing for closing the variable winning ball device 15.

(Embodiment 7)
In the sixth embodiment, when an abnormal winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, the starting winning itself is invalidated in the switch process. In the seventh embodiment, the second starting winning is performed. In the case where an abnormal winning to the mouth 14 occurs, the start winning itself is invalidated in the special symbol process.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing special symbol process processing according to the seventh embodiment. In the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the first start port passage process (the processes of steps S311 to S314) in the same manner as described with reference to FIG. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the abnormal winning notification flag is set (step S320) before executing the second start port notification process (steps S315 to S318).

  When the abnormal winning notification flag is set (Y in step S320), the gaming control microcomputer 560 does not execute the second start port notification processing (processing in steps S315 to S318), and the abnormal winning notification flag is set. When it is not set (N in step S320), the second start port notification process (the processes in steps S315 to S318) is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent random number extraction based on the abnormal second start winning, etc., variation based on the abnormal winning is prohibited, and the occurrence of a big hit based on the abnormal winning is surely prevented. can do.

  In the case of the seventh embodiment, since it is impossible to prohibit the payout of the winning ball based on the abnormal winning, the first embodiment (the winning ball number adding process in FIG. 54) and the sixth embodiment (the switch in FIG. 149). It is preferable to simultaneously execute the control for prohibiting the payout of the winning ball based on the abnormal winning as described in the processing.

(Embodiment 8)
FIG. 151 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board, the sound / lamp control board, and the display control board in the eighth embodiment. In the board configuration shown in FIG. 9, the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display state of the variable display device 9 and outputs control signals to the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70. Thus, the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27 are controlled. However, in the board configuration shown in FIG. 151, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80A controls the on / off of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27, and the display control board 80B. The display control microcomputer 100 </ b> B is configured to control the display state of the variable display device 9. Then, a control command (hereinafter, sound / lamp control command) from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is first transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A of the sound / lamp control board 80A. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A transmits a control command (hereinafter referred to as a display control command) corresponding to the sound / lamp control command received to the display control microcomputer 100B of the display control board 80B. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A controls the lighting / extinction of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27 based on the sound / lamp control command from the game control microcomputer 560. The display control microcomputer 100B The display state of the variable display device 9 is controlled based on a display control command from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A.

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing main sound / lamp control processing executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer according to the eighth embodiment. When the power is turned on, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A starts executing the main process. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control processing (step S711). Thereafter, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S712). When a timer interrupt occurs, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A clears the flag (step S713) and executes the following sound / lamp control process.

  In the sound / lamp control process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A first analyzes the received effect control command (sound / lamp side command analysis process: step S714). Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A performs a sound / lamp control process (step S715). In the sound / lamp control process, the process corresponding to the current control state is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and various lamps are turned on / off, the sound output of the speaker 27 is controlled, and the like. Further, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers is executed (step S716). Furthermore, a notification control process for performing notification by turning on / off various lamps, outputting sound from the speaker 27, or the like is executed (step S717). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S712.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing sound / lamp-side command analysis processing (step S714) in the sound / lamp control main processing. The sound / lamp control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the sound / lamp side command analysis processing, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S721). If a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the reception command is read from the command reception buffer (step S722).

  If the received sound / lamp control command is a control command (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 8080 (H)) designating the variation pattern (step S723), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A The command EXT data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S724), and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S725). Then, control for transmitting a display control command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control microcomputer 100B is executed (step S726).

  If the received sound / lamp control command is a control command (design information designation command: 8C00 (H) to 8C05 (H)) designating design information (step S727), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A Control for transmitting a display control command corresponding to the symbol information to the display control microcomputer 100B is executed (step S728). If the received sound / lamp control command is another control command, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A performs control to transmit a display control command corresponding to the other command to the display control microcomputer 100B. This is executed (step S729).

  When the display control microcomputer 100B receives a display control command from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A, the same processing as the processing of the effect control means described in each of the above embodiments based on the received command. Execute. That is, the processing in the case where “display control” is replaced with “display control” in FIGS. 57 to 116 is executed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. In the eighth embodiment, sound / lamp control is performed. Although the substrate 80A and the display control substrate 80B are provided, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, when the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted on two substrates, the way of dividing the circuit for controlling the effect device mounted on each substrate is arbitrary. For example, a first effect control board (display / lamp control board) on which a variable display device 9 and a circuit for controlling a lamp and the like are mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (such as the speaker 27) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards. In the eighth embodiment, the sound / lamp control board 80A transmits a display control command corresponding to the sound / lamp control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the display control board 80B. May be the same data as the sound / lamp control command, or may be changed to a simplified command and transmitted as a display control command. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, A command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

(Embodiment 9)
In the first embodiment, the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is a special symbol (“7 (outlined)”) on the active line, and the decorative symbol in the middle is a predetermined symbol (“3” “ 7 ”,“ 7 (outlined) ”), the symbols in the state of being aligned are used as probabilistic symbols, and the inside decorative symbols are aligned in the symbols“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 6 ”) other than the predetermined symbols. The design was suddenly changed to a probable design, and when the special design was reached, it was decided that it would be a big hit, and the game value was varied depending on the final design that was derived and displayed. In the ninth embodiment, the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is a special symbol (“7 (outlined)”) on the active line, and the decorative symbol in the middle is a predetermined symbol (“ 3 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 (outlined) ”), the symbols in the same state are used as probabilistic symbols, and the decorative patterns in the symbols are“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 6 ”) other than the predetermined symbols. It is configured to make the game value different depending on the last ornamental design that is derived and displayed while confirming that it will be a big hit when reaching a special symbol as a non-probable variable symbol . In this case, the symbols (“13UF” to “17UF”, “13LF” to “17LF”, “13CF” to “17CF”, “14SF” to “17SF”, “13AF”) shown in FIG. To “17AF”). Then, the decision values of the symbol selection tables (FIG. 92, FIG. 98, FIG. 101) used in the non-probable variation symbol determination process (FIG. 85, FIG. 86) are assigned to these symbols. What is necessary is just to comprise so that selection is possible as a big hit symbol. At this time, the sudden probability variation pattern (31T to 33T, 35T to 55T) of the array pattern shown in FIG. 7 is not used. That is, since the sudden probability variable symbol selection table (F-26) shown in FIG. 88 (B) and the single sudden probability variable symbol selection table (F-27) shown in FIG. 88 (C) are not used, the sudden probability variable symbol is selected. In the determination process (FIG. 87), the processes of step S1082 and steps S1084 to S1087 are not executed, and after the process of step S1081, the process proceeds to step S1083.

  Further, such a configuration may be used even when there are a plurality of special symbols. In that case, the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is the second special symbol (for example, “3”) on the effective line, and the decorative symbol in the middle is a symbol other than the predetermined symbol (for example, “2” “4”). “5” and “6”) may be added as a non-probable variable symbol. In addition, the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is the first special symbol (for example, “7 (outlined)”) on the active line, and the decorative symbol in the middle is a symbol other than the predetermined symbol (for example, “2”). ”“ 4 ”“ 5 ”“ 6 ”), and the combination of left and right decorative symbols is the second special symbol (eg“ 3 ”) on the active line. In the case where the decorative pattern inside is a pattern other than the predetermined design (for example, “2” “4” “5” “6”) You may combine with the case.

  Furthermore, when providing a small hit in each of the above embodiments, the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is a special symbol (“7 (outlined)”) on the active line, and the decorative symbol in the middle is Symbols in a state where they are arranged in a predetermined pattern (“3”, “7”, “7 (outlined)”) are defined as probabilistic patterns, and the decorative patterns in the patterns “2”, “4”, “5”, “ 6)), the game that is in the same state in the last derivation and display will be used to determine the game value. You may make it differ.

  In addition, when providing a small hit in each of the above embodiments, the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8 may be a common symbol (for example, “7”). In this way, the player will not be aware of the big hit or the small hit, the big hit type or the like by the symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the probable change state in the re-lottery effect is not impaired. Also, there is no loss of expectation for sudden or big hits.

  In addition, as a special symbol stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8, the symbol for 15 rounds (probable big hit, non-probable big hit) may be a common big hit symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the probability change big hit or the non-probability big hit is based on the symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8. In addition, when a small hit is provided, as a special symbol stop symbol displayed on the special symbol indicator 8, the symbol at the time of two rounds (sudden probability change big hit, small hit) may be a common symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the probability sudden hit or the big hit is suddenly determined by the symbols displayed on the special symbol display 8.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the display area (variable display unit) of the variable display device 9 is three columns (three) of left, middle, and right, but is not limited to this, and the variable display unit Even if there are four or more, the present invention can be applied. For example, if there are four variable display parts, it will be confirmed that a big hit (suddenly probable big hit or probable big hit) will be made when three special symbols are collected, and if the final stop symbol is a specific symbol, it will be a probable big hit What is necessary is just to comprise. Further, the variable display device 9 displays three decorative symbols in the vertical direction, but may display one frame.

  In each of the above embodiments, the special symbol “7 (outlined)” is also provided for the middle symbol (middle reel) that is derived and displayed at the end, but it is not necessary to provide the special symbol for the middle symbol. There is no. If a special symbol is not provided for the middle symbol, a special symbol (for example, “3” or “7”) is derived and displayed after reaching the special symbol, and the probability variation big hit is assumed. When the is derived and displayed, it may be configured so that the sudden probability change big hit (or normal big hit or small hit) is suddenly obtained.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the variation pattern command is a dedicated variation pattern command (a variation pattern command that is not a regular big hit / probable variation big hit combined variation pattern command), the decoration pattern is decorated based on the dedicated variation pattern command. It was comprised so that the stop symbol of a symbol might be determined. However, it is configured to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol by determining the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the symbol information specifying command at the normal time and referring to the contents of the variation pattern command only when the symbol information specifying command is missed. May be.

  In addition, if any of the variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern command dedicated to normal jackpot, or the variation pattern command dedicated to outliers is received, the symbol information designation command cannot be received. The stop design of the decorative design may be determined based on the content of the pattern command.

  In each of the above embodiments, the variation pattern command and the symbol information designation command are separated, but a single command may be used. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit one command indicating the variation pattern and the symbol information (disconnected, normal big hit, or probable big hit) to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of symbol variation. Good. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the symbol based on the common command, specifies the variation pattern (including the variation time), and further determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the re-draw lottery effect after the start of the big hit game, after the symbols are re-variable, the probability variation symbols are derived and displayed. However, it is referred to as “probability variation” without using the symbols. It is also possible to notify the player that a probable big hit has been made (by shifting to a probable change state) by displaying a simple character. In this case, instead of determining the probability variation symbol in steps S629 and S692, it is determined to display “probability variation”.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the big hit symbol is a flat eye such as “1 · 1 · 1”, but may be a combination of symbols other than the blue eye. For example, a big hit may be made when the left, middle and right symbols on the active line are aligned with “Large, Win, Ri”. In that case, it becomes reach when a part of the big hit symbol is arranged as the left and right symbols on the effective line.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of fluctuations after the end of the normal jackpot is counted at the start of the fluctuation, and the hourly flag is reset when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number. It is also possible to count the number of fluctuations after the completion and reset the time reduction flag when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the fluctuation pattern command for designating the fluctuation pattern at the time of 15 rounds of big hit is a fluctuation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit, a fluctuation pattern command dedicated to positive big hit, and a fluctuation dedicated to normal big hit. Although a pattern command is provided, it is possible to use only a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot and a variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot (no variation pattern command dedicated to regular jackpot).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when chances are continuously stopped and displayed, it is developed into a super reach that is likely to be a big hit according to the number of times the chances are stopped and displayed. Also good. It should be noted that continuous display of chances is called pseudo continuous notice or pseudo continuous fluctuation. For example, if the chance is stopped and displayed once, it will be developed into Super Reach A (super reach with a relatively low probability of big hit), and if the chance is stopped and displayed twice in succession (specifically, When the chance eyes are stopped and displayed from the normal fluctuation and the chance eyes are stopped and displayed again from the normal fluctuation), the system is developed into super reach B, and when the chance eyes are stopped and displayed three times in succession, the super reach is achieved. When the opportunity is stopped and displayed four times in succession, it may be developed into super reach D (super reach with the highest possibility of big hit). A plurality of types of opportunities with different development patterns for super reach may be prepared. Also, in the case of developing to super reach after the chance eye is displayed, even if the normal change is made after the chance eye is stopped and displayed, then the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped in order and then developed to super reach. Or, after the chance eye is stopped and displayed, it may be directly (suddenly) developed to super reach without changing normally.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the above embodiment can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the stop symbol of the special symbol variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning becomes the predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention can be applied even to a pachinko gaming machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when a winning is given to a predetermined electric combination that is released when a stop symbol of a variably displayed symbol becomes a predetermined symbol combination . Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of a reach design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of a jackpot symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes on production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes (sudden probability variation pattern) for sudden probability variation big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a sudden probability change design (special design). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal time pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a time shortening pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration symbol command control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command set process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command transmission process. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the two round jackpot game is executed. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the open pattern of the change time of a normal symbol, and a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal electric accessory operating process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the payout control signal. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a payout control signal. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of how to output a payout control signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the buffer used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormal winning notification process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an exclusive pattern decoration design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach non-losing determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for left symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for right symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for middle symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for middle symbol selection. It is a figure which shows the table for left symbol selection in story mode. It is a figure which shows the table for right symbols selection in story mode. It is a figure which shows the table for middle symbol selection in story mode. It is a figure which shows the table for middle symbol selection in story mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reach determination loss determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reach determination loss determination process. It is a figure which shows the reach design table for singles in story mode. It is a figure which shows the symbol selection table during the loss reach in story mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for common reach symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design table for singles. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design selection table for doubles. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for symbol selection during normal deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for symbol selection during super development. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes selection. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an exclusive pattern probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an exclusive pattern probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a non-probable variation symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a non-probable variation symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sudden probability variation design determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for a sudden probability variation design selection. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a combined pattern decoration design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a combined pattern probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a combined pattern probability variation design determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (normal jackpot, promotion after the jackpot game with re-lottery). It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal symbol temporary stop selection table (relief) for normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table for singles (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for single jackpot symbol selection (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for double hits (normal jackpot, promotion after the start of jackpot game with re-lottery). It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table (probability straight hit) for double after hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for double after (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for singles in the story mode (normal jackpot, promotion after starting the jackpot game with re-lottery). It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table (probability straight hit) for singles in story mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary determination symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the probability change design determination process at the time of missing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a figure which shows an example of a advancing direction table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the story effect performed in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the normal mode performed in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display at the time of performing the special effect of a truck reach during the story mode performed in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the special symbol in a variable display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the condition of the display effect in a variable display apparatus, and the sound effect by a speaker. It is a timing diagram which shows the detection timing which detects the abnormal winning to a 2nd start winning opening, and the alerting | reporting timing which performs abnormal winning alert | report. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormal winning alerting | reporting process in the case of clearing a winning cumulative number counter when a predetermined period has elapsed from a predetermined time. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormal winning alerting | reporting process in the case of clearing a winning cumulative number counter when a predetermined period has elapsed from a predetermined time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of the jackpot symbol and sudden probability variation symbol of Embodiment 2. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a single reach symbol selection table in the story mode according to the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the common reach design | selection table for Embodiment 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design table for singles of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design table for doubles of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for sudden probability variation design selection of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (probability straight hit) of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for singles (probability straight hit) of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table (probability straight hit) for double after hit of Embodiment 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the single jackpot symbol selection table (probability straight hit) in the story mode of Embodiment 2. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of content of an effect control command in the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an abnormal winning notification process in the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer according to the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating command analysis processing according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stopping process in the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating notification control processing in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram illustrating a detection timing for detecting an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening and a notification timing for executing an abnormal winning notification in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process in the case of clearing an abnormal prize accumulation number counter when the predetermined period passes from the predetermined time. 10 is a flowchart showing special symbol process processing in the fourth embodiment. 14 is a flowchart showing effect control process processing in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an ordinary electric accessory operating process in the fifth embodiment. 18 is a flowchart illustrating switch processing according to the sixth embodiment. 18 is a flowchart showing special symbol process processing in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 20 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of a relay board, a sound / lamp control board, and a display control board in an eighth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a sound / lamp control main process executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer according to the eighth embodiment. 29 is a flowchart showing sound / lamp side command analysis processing in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot symbol arrangement pattern in the ninth embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Glass door frame 3 Hitting ball supply tray 4 Surplus ball receiving tray 5 Hitting ball operation handle 6 Game board 7 Game area 8 Special symbol display device 9 Variable display device 10 Normal symbol display device 13 1st start prize opening 13a 1st start Mouth switch 14 Second start winning port 14a Second start port switch 15 Variable winning device 18 Special symbol storage memory indicator 23 Count switch 25 Decoration lamp 26 Out port 27 Speaker 28a Top frame lamp 28b Left frame lamp 28c Right frame lamp 29, 30, 33, 39 Prize opening 31 Main board 32 Gate 37 Payout control board 41 Normal symbol hold memory display 51 Prize ball LED
52 LED out of ball
53 Basic circuit 54 ROM
55 RAM
56 CPU
57 I / O port 58 Input driver circuit 59 Solenoid circuit 64 Information output circuit 80 Production control board 80A Sound / lamp control board 80B Display control board 94 Fire motor 100 Production control microcomputer 100A Sound / lamp control microcomputer 100B Display control Microcomputer 560 for game control

Claims (8)

A variable display device having three or more variable display units for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving and displaying a display result is provided, and a combination of specific identification information is derived as a display result of variable display A gaming machine that can be controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when displayed,
A special variable winning device capable of changing from a state in which the game ball does not win in the specific gaming state to a state in which it is easy to win,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling the effect device including the variable display device based on a command transmitted by the game control means,
The specific game state includes at least a first specific game state and a second specific game state that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state,
The game control means includes
Prior to deciding whether or not to set the specific gaming state, and whether to set the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state when the specific gaming state is set, before the display result is derived and displayed. A determination means;
Reach state determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display device is to be a reach state when it is determined that the specific game state is not set in the prior determination means;
Identification information determination means for determining identification information to be derived and displayed on each variable display unit based on the determination results of the prior determination means and the reach state determination means;
Variable display command transmission means for transmitting a variable display command capable of specifying the start of variable display of the identification information and the variable display time based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
State control means for controlling the special variable winning device by a common processing routine in the first specific game state and the second specific game state based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
An abnormality notification command transmission means for transmitting an abnormality notification command for instructing the execution of abnormality notification based on the fact that a game ball has won the special variable winning device in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state,
The production control means includes
Variable display that starts variable display of identification information in the variable display device based on the variable display command transmitted by the variable display command transmission means, and derives and displays the display result on the variable display device when the variable display time has elapsed. Control means;
Based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmitting means, after the abnormality notification is started by the effect device, the variable display control means is also executing variable display of identification information in the variable display device. An abnormality notification means for continuing the abnormality notification,
The identification information includes first identification information and second identification information,
The identification information determining means includes
When it is determined that the specific game state is not set in the pre-determining means and the reach state determining means is determined not to be in the reach state, the identification information is displayed in two or more variable display units of the variable display device. Among the variable display units in which the identification information is derived and displayed at the time when the identification information is not derived and displayed on some of the variable display units, the first identification information is displayed on one variable display unit and the other variable display unit is displayed. Identification information first determination means capable of determining the identification information so as to be the second identification information in the display unit;
When it is determined that the specific game state is not set in the prior determination unit and the reach state determination unit determines that the reach state is set, the identification information is stored in the variable display device with two or more variable display units. Identification in which the identification information can be determined so that it does not become the second identification information in the variable display part in which the identification information is derived and displayed when the identification information is not derived and displayed in some of the variable display parts. Information second determining means;
When the pre-determining means determines to enter the second specific gaming state, identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display device by two or more variable display units, and is identified by some variable display units. The identification that is determined to be the second identification information in the variable display section in which the identification information is derived and displayed when the information is not derived and displayed, and that is derived and displayed after a predetermined period of time in the partial variable display section Identification information third determination means capable of determining information as predetermined identification information;
When the pre-determining means determines that the first specific gaming state is set, identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display device by two or more variable display units, and is identified by some variable display units. The identification that is determined to be the second identification information in the variable display section in which the identification information is derived and displayed when the information is not derived and displayed, and that is derived and displayed after a predetermined period of time in the partial variable display section Identification information fourth determination means capable of determining information as identification information other than predetermined identification information;
A gaming machine characterized by including: A variable display device having three or more variable display units for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving and displaying a display result is provided, and a combination of specific identification information is derived as a display result of variable display The player is controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when displayed, and the player after the specific gaming state ends when a predetermined special display result is derived and displayed from a combination of specific identification information A game machine that can be controlled in a special gaming state advantageous to
A special variable winning device capable of changing from a state in which the game ball does not win in the specific gaming state to a state in which it is easy to win,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling the effect device including the variable display device based on a command transmitted by the game control means,
The specific game state includes at least a first specific game state and a second specific game state that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific game state,
The game control means includes
Whether to enter the specific gaming state, whether to enter the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state when entering the specific gaming state, and whether to enter the special gaming state after the specific gaming state , And a deciding means for deciding the display result before the display
Reach state determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display device is to be a reach state when it is determined that the specific game state is not set in the prior determination means;
Identification information determination means for determining identification information to be derived and displayed on each variable display unit based on the determination results of the prior determination means and the reach state determination means;
Variable display command transmission means for transmitting a variable display command capable of specifying the start of variable display of the identification information and the variable display time based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
State control means for controlling the special variable winning device by a common processing routine in the first specific game state and the second specific game state based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
An abnormality notification command transmission means for transmitting an abnormality notification command for instructing the execution of abnormality notification based on the fact that a game ball has won the special variable winning device in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state,
The production control means includes
Variable display that starts variable display of identification information in the variable display device based on the variable display command transmitted by the variable display command transmission means, and derives and displays the display result on the variable display device when the variable display time has elapsed. Control means;
Based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmitting means, after the abnormality notification is started by the effect device, the variable display control means is also executing variable display of identification information in the variable display device. An abnormality notification means for continuing the abnormality notification,
The identification information includes first identification information and second identification information,
The identification information determining means includes
When it is determined that the specific game state is not set in the pre-determining means and the reach state determining means is determined not to be in the reach state, the identification information is displayed in two or more variable display units of the variable display device. Among the variable display units in which the identification information is derived and displayed at the time when the identification information is not derived and displayed on some of the variable display units, the first identification information is displayed on one variable display unit and the other variable display unit is displayed. Identification information first determination means capable of determining the identification information so as to be the second identification information in the display unit;
When it is determined that the specific game state is not set in the prior determination unit and the reach state determination unit determines that the reach state is set, the identification information is stored in the variable display device with two or more variable display units. Identification in which the identification information can be determined so that it does not become the second identification information in the variable display part in which the identification information is derived and displayed when the identification information is not derived and displayed in some of the variable display parts. Information second determining means;
In the prior determination means, when it is determined that the specific gaming state is set and the special gaming state is determined after the specific gaming state, the identification information is displayed on the variable display device by two or more variable display units. Is determined and displayed to be second identification information in the variable display unit in which the identification information is derived and displayed at a time when the identification information is not derived and displayed in some of the variable display units. Identification information fifth determination means capable of determining the identification information derived and displayed after a predetermined period of time in the variable display section as predetermined identification information;
When it is determined in the pre-determining means that the specific gaming state is set and it is determined that the special gaming state is not set after the specific gaming state, the identification information is identified by two or more variable display units on the variable display device. Is determined and displayed to be second identification information in the variable display unit in which the identification information is derived and displayed at a time when the identification information is not derived and displayed in some of the variable display units. Identification information sixth determination means capable of determining the identification information derived and displayed after a predetermined period of time in the variable display section as identification information other than the predetermined identification information;
A gaming machine characterized by including: Of the three or more variable display units, the first variable display unit is provided with first data for determining the first stop identification information, which is data for determining the identification information of the first variable display unit that first derives and displays the identification information,
The first data for determining the first stop identification information is configured such that a ratio determined as the second identification information as identification information derived and displayed is higher than a ratio determined as the first identification information. ,
The identification information determination means is for determining the first stop identification information when the prior determination means determines that the specific gaming state is not set and the reach state determination means determines that the reach state is not set. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit is determined based on the first data. The gaming state includes a normal gaming state that is different from the specific gaming state and the special gaming state, and a special gaming state that has a different aspect from the normal gaming state,
The first data for determining the first stop identification information includes second data for determining the first stop identification information and third data for determining the first stop identification information,
The third data for determining the first stop identification information is configured to have a higher ratio of determining the second identification information as the identification information to be derived and displayed than the second data for determining the first stop identification information. And
The identification information determining means includes
When the predetermination means decides not to enter the specific gaming state, the reach state judgment means decides not to reach the reach state, and the normal gaming state, the first stop identification information determining second Determining identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit based on two data;
When it is determined that the specific game state is not set in the prior determination means, the reach state determination means is determined not to be in the reach state, and the special game state is set, the first stop identification information determination second The gaming machine according to claim 1, 2, or 3, wherein identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit is determined based on three data. The second identification information includes at least third identification information and fourth identification information,
The first data for determining first stop identification information further includes fourth data for determining first stop identification information and fifth data for determining first stop identification information,
The identification information determining means includes
When it is determined not to be in the specific gaming state in the pre-determining means, and it is determined not to be in the reach state in the reach state determining means,
Determining the identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit based on the fourth data for determining the first stop identification information;
When it is determined by the prior determination means to be in a specific gaming state, identification information derived and displayed on the first variable display unit is determined based on the first stop identification information determination fifth data,
The ratio X1 determined as third identification information in the first stop identification information determination fourth data, the ratio X2 determined as fourth identification information in the first stop identification information determination fourth data, and the first stop The ratio X3 determined as the third identification information in the fifth identification information determination data and the ratio X4 determined as the fourth identification information in the first stop identification information determination fifth data are X1 / X3 <X2 / X4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the relationship is satisfied. The identification information determining means is derived and displayed after reaching the reach state when the advance determining means determines not to enter the specific gaming state and the reach state determining means determines to reach the reach state. The final stop identification information is determined based on a difference determination table for determining a difference between final stop identification information that is identification information and identification information other than the final stop identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 5. A variable winning device that can be changed between a closed state in which no game ball is won and an open state in which the game ball can be won;
Open / close determining means for determining an open / closed state of the variable winning device;
And an abnormality notification means for performing abnormality notification based on the fact that a game ball has won the variable winning device when it is determined by the opening / closing determination means that the variable winning device is not in an open state. ,
The game according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the abnormality notification means can execute abnormality notification even when variable display of identification information is being performed in the variable display device. Machine.   The effect control means stores variable display control data for executing variable display of identification information in the variable display device, and abnormality notification control data for executing abnormality notification by the effect device.
  The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that:

Images